JP7284312B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine is known to perform a specific sound effect in which a drive means is driven to generate an operation sound such as a vibration sound of a predetermined part in addition to a normal sound effect in which a sound is output from a speaker. The sound effect by the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect is executed in the notice effect etc. performed during the symbol variation.
In addition , in many game machines, the volume level of the sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by operating a volume adjustment button or other operation means arranged on the front side of the game machine body ( for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-42880

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of more suitably performing effects including sound effects .

The present invention comprises pattern display means capable of variably displaying a pattern, image display means capable of displaying an image, sound output means capable of outputting sound, and vibration sound capable of generating vibration sound by vibrating a predetermined part. a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when the stopped symbols after being changed by the symbol display means are in a specific mode, wherein the image display means displays a first character image and a an image effect using a plurality of types of character images including a second character image, and a specific effect that provides a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of the specific mode, wherein the specific effect is the suggestive effect It has a first half section in which no effect is executed and a second half section in which the suggestive effect is executed, and the sound output means outputs a sound related to the specific effect at a first volume when executing the first half section, and When the second half section is executed, the sound related to the specific effect is output at a second volume larger than the first volume, and the sound related to the specific effect is output after the first half section is executed and before the second half section is executed. output at a third volume smaller than the first volume, and the vibration sound generating means is capable of generating the vibration sound in parallel with the sound when outputting the sound relating to the specific effect at the second volume. , when outputting the first sound corresponding to the first character image, the first sound is output while the first character image is displayed, and the second sound corresponding to the second character image is output. In this case, it is possible to output the second voice without displaying the second character image .

According to the present invention, it is possible to more preferably perform effects including sound effects .

1 is an overall front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the glass door of the pachinko machine. It is a principal part top view which shows the production|presentation button of the same pachinko machine, a cross operation means, a sound volume adjustment operation means, a light amount adjustment operation means, etc. FIG. It is a front cross-sectional view of the operation effect means of the pachinko machine and its vicinity. It is a side cross-sectional view of the operation effect means of the pachinko machine and its vicinity. It is a front cross-sectional view showing a state in which the effect button of the pachinko machine is pressed. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game information display means of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the board movable body of the same pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko machine. It is a diagram showing the connection relationship between the LED common port and the LED data port of the pachinko machine, game information display means, and performance information display means (setting display means, performance display means). It is a figure which shows the corresponding relationship of the transition branch determination pattern and transition branch destination by the door open signal, the RAM clear switch signal, and the setting key switch signal of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart (first half) of the power-on process of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart (second half) of the power-on process of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting change process of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power supply abnormality check process of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the same pachinko machine. It is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table (setting 6 stages) of the same pachinko machine and the contents of the first to third information therein. It is a figure which shows distribution of the determination value which concerns on a jackpot determination of the same pachinko machine, (a) shows the case of setting 1, (b) shows the case of setting 6. FIG. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table (setting 1 stage) of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of LED management processing of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the LED common output selection table of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process outside the use area of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of LED update processing outside the use area of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the sound volume adjustment alerting|reporting image of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the light quantity adjustment alerting|reporting image of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a changing state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is being displayed in the pachinko machine; It is a figure which shows reset conditions and reset processing of the sound volume level of the same pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the image production|presentation in the hold change notice of the same pachinko machine, and sound production|presentation. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the volume history of the sound effects shown in FIG. 33 divided into normal sound effects and specific sound effects; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between a first volume LP1 (dB), a second volume LP2 (dB), and a synthesized volume LP (dB) obtained by synthesizing them; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of image production|presentation and sound production|presentation in the normal fluctuation|variation (during probability variable state) of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing part of the volume history of the sound effects shown in FIG. 36, divided into normal sound effects and specific sound effects; It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (1/2) of the image effect and sound effect in the normal fluctuation of the pachinko machine (during the normal game state). It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (2/2) of the image effect and sound effect in the normal fluctuation (during the normal game state) of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing part of the volume history of the sound effects shown in FIG. 38, divided into normal sound effects and specific sound effects; It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (1/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (2/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (3/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (4/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (5/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the portion 42s to 61s in the volume history of the sound effects shown in FIG. 41, divided into normal sound effects and specific sound effects. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the portion 92s to 96s in the volume history of the sound effects shown in FIG. 43, divided into normal sound effects and specific sound effects. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (1/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (2/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (3/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing the flow (4/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (5/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the ready-to-win effect (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the portion 42s to 61s in the volume history of the sound effects shown in FIG. 46, divided into normal sound effects and specific sound effects. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a changing state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is being displayed in the pachinko machine; It is the figure which showed the history of the sound volume in the normal sound production|presentation and specific sound production|presentation at the time of setting a hole setting value to T7 with the same pachinko machine for every volume level. It is the figure which showed the history of the sound volume in the normal sound production|presentation and specific sound production|presentation at the time of setting a hole setting value to T3 in the same pachinko machine for every volume level. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a changing state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is being displayed in the pachinko machine; It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a changing state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is being displayed in the pachinko machine; It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a changing state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is being displayed in the pachinko machine; It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the sound volume adjustment alerting|reporting image of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a changing state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is being displayed in the pachinko machine; It is the figure which showed the history of the sound volume in the normal sound production|presentation and specific sound production|presentation at the time of setting a hole setting value to T7 with the same pachinko machine for every volume level. It is the figure which showed the history of the sound volume in the normal sound production|presentation and specific sound production|presentation at the time of setting a hole setting value to T3 in the same pachinko machine for every volume level. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a changing state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is being displayed in the pachinko machine; It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine based on the 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a change of the volume level setting table of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine based on the 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 12th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine based on the 13th Embodiment of this invention. Volume level setting table (a) for game volume of pachinko machine according to 14th embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting table for error volume, for specific notification sound is a diagram showing a volume level setting table (e) of . Volume level setting table (a) for game volume of pachinko machine according to 15th embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting table for error volume, for specific notification sound is a diagram showing a volume level setting table (e) of . Volume level setting table (a) for game volume of pachinko machine according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting table for error volume, for specific notification sound is a diagram showing a volume level setting table (e) of . Volume level setting table (a) for game volume of pachinko machine according to 17th embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting table for error volume, for specific notification sound is a diagram showing a volume level setting table (e) of . Volume level setting table (a) for game volume of pachinko machine according to 18th embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting table for error volume, for specific notification sound is a diagram showing a volume level setting table (e) of . Volume level setting table (a) for game volume of pachinko machine according to 19th embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting table for error volume, for specific notification sound is a diagram showing a volume level setting table (e) of . It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 20th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table (setting 6 steps) of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table (setting 1 stage) of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various items before and after the production|presentation which steals eyes during one pattern change.

Embodiments of the invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 to 48-1 illustrate a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine. 1 and 2, a gaming machine body 1 includes an outer frame 2 and a front frame 3 arranged in front of the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG. The front frame 3 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and detachable via a vertical first hinge 4 arranged at one end in the left-right direction, for example, the left end. The outer frame 2 can be locked in the closed state by a locking means 5 provided on the opposite side, for example, the right end side.

The front frame 3 has a middle frame 6 and a glass door 7 arranged in front of the middle frame 6. - 特許庁The glass door 7 is pivotally attached to the middle frame 6 so as to be openable and detachable via a vertical second hinge 8 arranged at one end in the left-right direction, for example, the left end. can be locked in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 2c and 2d. A front cover member 9 made of, for example, synthetic resin is attached to the front lower portion of the outer frame 2 so as to connect the front lower portions of the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b along the front edge of the lower horizontal frame member 2d. there is The front cover member 9 protrudes forward from the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b, and the middle frame 6 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In the outer frame 2, an outer frame upper hinge metal fitting 11 constituting the first hinge 4 is disposed, for example, at the upper left portion, and an outer frame lower hinge metal fitting 12 is disposed above the front cover member 9 at the lower left portion.

The middle frame 6 is made of synthetic resin, and has a rectangular frame portion 13 which can contact the front edge side of the outer frame 2 on the upper side of the front cover member 9, and a game board provided on the upper side in the frame portion 13. A mounting portion 14 and a lower mounting portion 15 provided on the lower side in the frame portion 13 are integrally provided, for example. A game board 16 is detachably attached to the game board mounting portion 14, for example, from the front side. In the middle frame 6, a main body frame upper hinge metal fitting 19 constituting the first hinge 4 and a main body frame upper hinge metal fitting 20 constituting the second hinge 8 are arranged, for example, at the upper left portion of the first and second hinges 4, 8. Main body frame lower hinge metal fittings 21 are arranged, for example, in the lower left part.

The glass door 7 has a resin door base 22 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the middle frame 6 . The door base 22 is formed with window holes 24a of a glass window 24 corresponding to the front side of the game area 23 formed on the game board 16. For example, a plurality of windows (four here) are formed around the window holes 24a. Various production means such as an upper speaker 25, a first frame movable body 26, a second frame movable body 27, and an air blowing means 28 are arranged.

On the upper front side of the door base 22, a side unit 30 is attached to at least a part of the outer periphery of the window hole 24a, for example, a substantially L-shaped part corresponding to the upper side and the right side of the window hole 24a, and the other part, For example, an upper decorative cover 31 is mounted on the left side of the window hole 24a. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, for example, with the front frame 3 opened, the side unit 30 can be used to remove the fixing screw 30a, the fixing lever 30b, etc. on the back side of the front frame 3 without using special tools. It can be easily attached and detached by operating. Normally, the front frame 3 is commonly used for a plurality of models, and by mounting a different game board 16 for each model on the front frame 3, the playability and design unique to the model are realized. In the machine, a part of the front side of the front frame 3 is made into a side unit 30 which is more easily detachable than other parts, and the side unit 30 has a design with a sense of unity with the game board 16 and a unique function. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design and function for each model while standardizing most of the front frame 3 .

A first frame movable body 26, a second frame movable body 27, a blowing means 28, and the like are mounted on the side unit 30 of the present embodiment. The first frame movable body 26 can be slid substantially in the front-rear direction by being driven by drive means (not shown). The second frame movable body 27 can be slid substantially in the front-rear direction by being driven by drive means (not shown), and can be pushed by the player. The air blowing means 28 can blow air toward the hands of the player at the timing when the player operates the second frame movable body 27 .

On the lower front side of the door base 22 is an upper tray 33 which stores the game balls put out from the putting out means 32 arranged on the rear side of the middle frame 6 and supplies them to the shooting means 17, and the upper tray 33 is full. A lower tray 34 for storing surplus balls, etc., and a firing handle 35 operated to operate the firing means 17 are arranged, and a lower decorative cover 36 that substantially covers the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, etc. from the front side is attached. It is The lower decorative cover 36 is formed, for example, in a forward-facing bulging shape, and is provided with operation means such as an operation presentation means 37, a cross operation means 38, a sound volume operation means 39, and a light amount operation means 40, for example. (Fig. 4).

The operation presentation means 37 is used for advance notice presentation during pattern variation and other presentations, and as shown in FIGS. A movable performance means 42 arranged inside the performance button 41 and a vibration generating means 43 for vibrating the performance button 41 are provided and arranged in the lower decorative cover 36. - 特許庁

The movable effect means 42 includes a substantially spherical rotating body 44, a horizontal shaft member 45 that rotatably supports the rotating body 44, a light emitting substrate 46 arranged in the rotating body 44, and a rotating body 44. 44, and a support frame 48 for supporting the shaft member 45, the rotation driving means 47, and the like.

Rotating body 44 is formed in a hollow shape from a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and is rotatably supported by shaft member 45 via cylindrical rotating shafts 49a and 49b fixed to both left and right sides thereof. The shaft member 45 passes through the inside of the rotating body 44 from side to side, and a light emitting substrate 46 is fixed to the substantially central portion thereof. The light emitting substrate 46 is for illuminating the rotating body 44 from the inside, and for example, a plurality of LEDs 50 are arranged on the upper surface side thereof.

The support frame 48 is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front by a pair of left and right vertical frames 48a and 48b and a horizontal frame 48c connecting the lower ends of the vertical frames 48a and 48b to the left and right. Left and right ends of the shaft member 45 are detachably fixed to the upper parts of the frames 48a and 48b. A rotary drive means 47 such as a stepping motor is fixed to one of the vertical frames 48a and 48b (here, the right vertical frame 48b) with the drive shaft 47a protruding inward. A driven gear 51 is provided on one of the left and right rotating shafts 49a and 49b (here, the right rotating shaft 49b). The mounted drive gear 52 is in mesh. As a result, when the rotation driving means 47 operates in the forward or reverse direction, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating body 44 via the driving gear 52 and the driven gear 51, and the rotating body 44 rotates around its axis in the horizontal direction. do.

The support frame 48 is supported by the door base 22 via, for example, a production button base 53 fixed to its lower side. The production button base 53 is made of sheet metal, for example, and has a rectangular mounting plate 54 arranged substantially horizontally along the lower surface side of the horizontal frame 48c, and a mounting plate 54 extending downward from both left and right edges of the mounting plate 54. A pair of left and right connecting plates 55a and 55b, base plates 56a and 56b extending laterally outward from the lower edges of the left and right connecting plates 55a and 55b, and downward extending from the rear edge side of the mounting plate 54, for example. The mounting plate 54 is fixed to the horizontal frame 48c, and the support plate 57 is fixed to a fixing member 58 mounted on the front side of the door base 22, for example.

The production button 41 constitutes a cover body that covers the movable production means 42 inside, and is made of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin. It is integrally provided with a substantially spherical operating portion 62 formed so as to substantially close the upper end side of the body portion 61 . The trunk portion 61 is provided with notch portions 64a and 64b formed upward from the lower end side on the left and right side surfaces thereof. The production button 41 is mounted from above so as to cover the movable production means 42 while the rotating shafts 49a and 49b are loosely fitted in the left and right cutouts 64a and 64b. It is exposed upward through a button hole 65 formed in the cover 36 .

A substantially circular elevating plate 66 disposed substantially horizontally between the horizontal frame 48c and the base plates 56a and 56b is detachably fixed to the lower end of the effect button 41. As shown in FIG. An insertion hole 67 is formed substantially in the center of the elevating plate 66 , and the upper portion of the effect button base 53 is vertically inserted through the insertion hole 67 .

The elevating plate 66 has a plurality of guide pins 68 projecting downward, for example, two guide pins 68 on each of the left and right sides, for a total of four. These guide pins 68 are for guiding the effect button 41 in the vertical direction, and are inserted downward into guide holes 69 formed in the base plates 56a and 56b. A coil spring 70 is attached to each guide pin 68 . This coil spring 70 has a diameter larger than that of the guide hole 69 and is arranged between the lift plate 66 and the base plates 56a and 56b. is elastically biased.

The effect button 41 is held at the upper non-operating position (indicated by the solid line in FIGS. 5 and 6 and by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 7) by restricting the upward movement of the elevator plate 66 by the horizontal frame 48c. Between the horizontal frame 48c and the elevating plate 66, a plurality of cushioning members 71 made of an elastic material such as silicon rubber are arranged. The upward movement is restricted by coming into contact with the lower surface side of the horizontal frame 48c via. The buffer member 71 may be attached to either the horizontal frame 48c or the lifting plate 66. As shown in FIG.

A vibration generating means 43 is attached to the lower side of the performance button base 53. - 特許庁The vibration generating means 43 includes a vibrating device 72 and a vibrating base 73 that vibrates when the vibrating device 72 is operated. 53 are mounted on base plates 56a and 56b. A plurality of guide pin insertion holes 75 are provided in the vibration base 73, and the guide pins 68 are inserted downward into the guide pin insertion holes 75, respectively.

The vibrating device 72 is composed of a motor having an eccentric weight 72a attached to a drive shaft. It is detachably fixed to substantially the center of the lower surface of the vibration base 73 . By activating the vibration device 72, the vibration base 73 supported via the cushion member 74 vibrates with respect to the production button base 53, and the vibration causes the guide pin 68 inserted through the guide pin insertion hole 75 to move. It is transmitted to the effect button 41 via.

By the way, the production by the movable body has the aspect of the movable production that appeals to the player's sense of sight or touch through the action of the movable body, and the aspect of the sound production that similarly appeals to the player's sense of hearing. Of course, there are movable bodies that do not substantially generate sound effects, such as when the movement sound of the movable body is extremely low or when there is no sound.

Of the two movable bodies (the rotating body 44 and the effect button 41) of the operation rendering means 37, the rotating body 44 rotated by the drive of the rotation driving means 47 can be visually recognized by the player. In addition to being able to do so (movable effect), it is possible to audibly recognize the operation sound such as "clattering" caused by the driving of the rotation driving means 47 (sound effect). In addition, regarding the effect button 41 that vibrates by driving the vibration device 72, the player can recognize the vibration of the effect button 41 by the tactile sense of the hand (movable effect), and the operation sound (vibration sound) generated by the vibration ) can be audibly recognized (sound effect).

Here, among the movable effects and sound effects related to the operation of the effect button 41, the movable effect appealing to the player's tactile sense is not realized unless the player touches the effect button 41, but the sound appealing to the player's sense of hearing. The effect is established regardless of whether the player touches the effect button 41 or not. However, regarding the sound effect, the volume of the generated operation sound (vibration sound) changes depending on whether the player is touching the effect button 41 or not, and furthermore, whether or not the player is pressing it.

That is, when the player operates the vibrating device 72 without touching the effect button 41, the operating sounds are (1) the operating sound of the vibrating device 72, and (2) the vibration between the vibration base 73 and the guide pin 68. (3) contact sound between the lifting plate 66 and the horizontal frame 48c (through the buffer member 71); (4) contact sound from other joints (play); On the other hand, when the vibration device 72 is operated while the player is touching the effect button 41, the operation sound (1) is the same as when the player is not touching the effect button 41, but the game is played. The user's hand acts as a buffer material to limit the driving of the production button (predetermined portion) 41 by the vibration device (driving means) 72, and the vibration of the production button 41 is suppressed, so the contact sounds (2) to (4) becomes smaller than when the player does not touch the effect button 41, and the operation sound becomes smaller as a whole. Furthermore, when the vibration device 72 is activated while the player is not only touching the production button 41 but also pressing it, the elevating plate 66 of the production button 41 moves to the horizontal frame 48c as shown in FIG. , and at least the contact sound of (3) is not generated, so the operating sound is further reduced. Thus, the volume of the vibration sound of the production button 41 (the volume of the specific sound production) becomes the maximum volume when the player does not touch the production button 41 (when the specific volume change operation is not performed).

As shown in FIG. 4, the cross-shaped operating means 38 has four operation keys 38a to 38d for up, down, left, and right, and is used when operations such as cursor movement up, down, left, and right are required, such as when selecting menu items. . The volume operation means (B operation means, first operation means) 39 is used for volume adjustment by the player, and is provided with a plus key 39a and a minus key 39b as shown in FIG. By operating the two operation keys 39a and 39b, the player setting value (Otsu value) relating to the sound volume can be set in a plurality of steps, for example, any of five steps from M1 to M5. The light amount operation means 40 is used for the player to adjust the light amount, and as shown in FIG. 4, has a plus key 40a and a minus key 40b. As a result, the light amount level can be set in a plurality of steps, for example, any one of 1 to 3.

In this embodiment, the volume operation means 39 dedicated to volume adjustment and the light amount operation means 40 dedicated to light amount adjustment are provided. It may also be used for adjustment.

As shown in FIG. 2, a glass unit 80 is detachably mounted on the rear side of the door base 22 to substantially block the window hole 24a from the rear side, and is attached to the edges of the first and second hinges 4 and 8. A vertical hinge end side reinforcing sheet metal 81a arranged along the edge of the opening and closing end side, a vertical opening and closing end side reinforcing sheet metal 81b arranged along the edge of the opening and closing end side, and left and right sides arranged below the window hole 24a. The direction lower reinforcing sheet metal 81c is detachably fixed by screws or the like. Further, on the door base 22, a glass door upper hinge metal fitting 82a and a glass door lower hinge metal fitting 82b constituting the second hinge 8 are disposed, for example, at the upper left portion and the lower left portion, respectively.

Further, for example, a ball feeding unit 83a, a lower plate guide unit 83b, and the like are mounted on the back side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 81c. The ball feeding unit 83 a is for feeding the game balls in the upper tray 33 to the shooting means 17 one by one, and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the shooting means 17 . The lower tray guide unit 83b guides surplus balls when the upper tray 33 is full and foul balls that have returned without reaching the game area 23 despite being shot by the shooting means 17 to the lower tray 34. For example, it is arranged adjacent to the ball feeding unit 83a on the side of the first and second hinges 4 and 8 thereof.

Further, a door opening switch 84 capable of detecting whether or not the front frame 3 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 is provided, for example, on the upper side of the middle frame 6 . For example, the door opening switch 84 is configured to be ON when the front frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and to be OFF when the front frame 3 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 8, the game board 16 includes a base plate 85 such as a plywood board, and in front of the base plate 85, a guide rail 86 for guiding game balls shot from the shooting means 17 is arranged in an annular shape. In addition, in the game area 23 inside the guide rail 86, in addition to unit parts such as a central display frame unit 87, a start winning unit 88, a normal winning unit 89, etc., a large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged. A game information display means 90 is arranged outside the area 23, for example, on the lower side. Of course, the game information display means 90 may be arranged within the game area 23 .

As shown in FIG. 9, the game information display means 90 is provided with four LED groups composed of, for example, eight LEDs 100. A total of 32 LEDs 100 are normal symbol display means 91 and normal reserved number display means. 92, first special symbol display means 93, second special symbol display means 94, first special reserved number display means 95, second special reserved number display means 96, fluctuation shortening notification means 97, right hitting notification means 98 and number of rounds A predetermined number of them are assigned to the notification means 99 . That is, the eight LEDs 100 belonging to the first and second LED groups 90a and 90b constitute the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94, respectively, and the eight LEDs 100 belonging to the third LED group 90c are two. Eight LEDs 100 belonging to the fourth LED group 90d are divided into the first special reserved number display means 95, the second special reserved number display means 96, the normal reserved number display means 92, and the fluctuation shortening notification means 97, respectively. , two of them constitute normal symbol display means 91, the other two constitute right-handed informing means 98, and the remaining four constitute round number informing means 99, respectively.

On the plurality of unit parts 87 to 89 of the game board 16, normal symbol starting means 101, first special symbol starting means 102, second special symbol starting means 103, big winning means 104, a plurality of normal winning means 105, etc. is provided. In addition to the liquid crystal display means (image display means) 106, movable bodies such as a first board movable body 107, a second movable board 108, and a third movable board 109 are arranged on the rear side of the base plate 85. there is Of course, the image display means is not limited to the liquid crystal display means.

The central display frame unit 87 constitutes a display frame for the liquid crystal display means 106 and the movable bodies 107 to 109, and an opening window 110 corresponding to the liquid crystal display means 106 on the rear side is formed substantially in the center. It is detachably attached from the front side to an attachment hole (not shown) formed in the front-rear direction penetrating portion 85 . This central display frame unit 87, as shown in FIG. The decorative frame 112 is arranged in a substantially gate shape extending from the left and right sides to the upper part on the front side of the front side, and is arranged between the decorative frame 112 projecting forward on the inner peripheral side of the front mounting plate 111 and the left and right lower ends of the decorative frame 112. and a stage 113 to be performed. The game balls that are shot by the shooting means 17 and enter the upper part of the game area 23 are distributed to the left and right at the top of the decoration frame 112, and are distributed to the left and right flow paths 114a and 114b, respectively, on the left side and the right side of the central display frame unit 87, respectively. or flow down.

The central display frame unit 87 is provided with a warp entrance 115 through which game balls can flow in at least one of the left flow path 114a and the right flow path 114b, for example, the left flow path 114a. The game ball that flows into the warp entrance 115 while flowing down the left flow path 114a freely rolls in the left-right direction on the stage 113, and then moves to the center drop portion 116 provided corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 23. and the other portion to the front. In addition, on the upper side of the stage 113, an intrusion prevention means 117 is provided to prevent the game ball from entering the rear side due to rebounding or the like.

The first board movable body 107 and the third board movable body 109 are both arranged in a horizontally long shape in front of the liquid crystal display means 106, and both left and right sides thereof are supported outside the opening window 110 so as to be vertically movable. They can be moved up and down individually by an up-and-down driving means (not shown). The first movable body 107 of the board has an origin position (FIG. 10(a)) on the upper side of the opening window 110, and a maximum movement position (FIG. 10(b)) substantially in the center in the vertical direction. , the origin position is below the opening window 110 (FIG. 10(a)), and the maximum operation position is below the opening window 110 (FIG. 10(c)). When both the first board movable body 107 and the third board movable body 109 move to the maximum operating position, they are vertically adjacent to each other on the central front side of the liquid crystal display means 106 (FIG. 10(e)). .

The second board movable body 108 is a three-dimensional object formed in a predetermined shape such as a character, is arranged in front of the first board movable body 107, and can vertically move integrally with the first board movable body 107. At the same time, it can be rotated about the center axis in the front-rear direction with respect to the first board movable body 107 by being driven by a rotation drive means (not shown). In this embodiment, the second movable board 108 is always visible from the front side through the opening window 110. For example, when the first movable board 107 is at the origin position, the second movable board 108 is open. At least a portion may be hidden above the window 110 so that it cannot be visually recognized from the front side.

The second movable board 108 performs a "swinging motion" (Fig. 10(d)) in which it reciprocates within a predetermined angular range, and a "rotating motion" (Fig. 10(e)) in which it rotates 360 degrees or more. is possible. Note that the rocking motion can be performed regardless of the position of the first board movable body 107, but the rotating motion can be performed only when the first board movable body 107 is at the maximum motion position, for example.

The starting winning unit 88 is arranged below the central display frame unit 87 as shown in FIG. 8, and is detachably attached to the base plate 85 from the front side. As shown in FIG. 8, the normal winning unit 89 is arranged below the central display frame unit 87 and to the left of the starting winning unit 88, and is detachably attached to the base plate 85 from the front side.

The normal symbol starting means 101 is for starting the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal symbol display means 91, and is composed of a passage gate or the like through which the game ball can pass, and is a passage detection means ( (illustration omitted). As shown in FIG. 8, the normal symbol starting means 101 is provided, for example, on the front side of the front mounting plate 111 on the right side of the central display frame unit 87, so that game balls flowing down the right flow path 114b can pass through. ing.

The normal symbol display means 91 is for variably displaying normal symbols, and is composed of, for example, two LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90 as shown in FIG. Based on the detection, after the two LEDs 100 constituting the normal symbol emit light in the light emission pattern during normal fluctuation, the hit judgment randomness included in the normal random number information acquired when the game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting means 101 If the numerical value matches a predetermined hit determination value, the variation is stopped in a win mode, and in other cases, the change is stopped in a losing mode. In addition, the two LEDs 100 that constitute the normal pattern can display one or more winning modes and one or more losing modes depending on the combination of their light emission modes (for example, lighting / extinguishing). The light emission pattern is such that, for example, a plurality of specific types (here, two types) of light emission modes are switched every predetermined time (for example, 128 ms).

Further, when the normal symbol starting means 101 detects the game ball during the normal holding period including during the symbol fluctuation of the normal symbol display means 91 and during the normal profit state, the normal random number information acquired thereby is predetermined. The set upper limit reserved number, for example, 4, is reserved and stored, and each time the normal reserved period ends, one is consumed and the normal pattern is varied. The stored number of normal random number information (normal reserved number) is notified to the player by the normal reserved number display means 92 or the like. The normal reserved number display means 92 is composed of, for example, two LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90 as shown in FIG. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display 5 types of normal reserved numbers from 0 to 4.

The first special symbol starting means 102 is for starting the symbol variation by the first special symbol display means 93, and is composed of a non-opening/closing type winning means having no opening/closing means, and detects a winning game ball. A detection means (not shown) is provided. This first special symbol starting means 102 is provided, for example, in the starting winning unit 88 as shown in FIG. Since there is a winning route via the stage 113 from the warp entrance 115 on the side of the flow path 114a, the probability of the game ball flowing down the left flow path 114a is higher than that of the game ball flowing down the right flow path 114b. It is possible to win a prize at In addition, when a game ball wins the first special symbol starting means 102, a predetermined number of game balls per one win are paid out as prize balls.

The second special symbol starting means 103 is for starting the symbol variation by the second special symbol display means 94, and by operating the opening/closing part 118, the game ball can It is composed of opening and closing type winning means that can be changed to a closed state (which is difficult to win a prize), and has a game ball detection means (not shown) for detecting a winning game ball, and stops after the normal symbol display means 91 changes. When the pattern is in the winning mode and the ordinary profit state is generated, the opening/closing portion 118 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

This second special symbol starting means 103 is arranged on the front mounting plate 111 in the right part of the central display frame unit 87 and downstream of the normal symbol starting means 101 as shown in FIG. A game ball flowing down 114b can win a prize. The opening/closing part 118 can swing around a rotating shaft in the left-right direction provided on the lower side, for example. In the open state, the front side of the front mounting plate 111 is tilted downward to the rear so that the game balls are awarded backward. When a game ball wins the second special symbol starting means 103, a predetermined number of game balls per one win are paid out as prize balls.

The first special symbol display means (symbol display means) 93 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90 as shown in FIG. 9, and the first special symbol starting means 102 detects the game ball. On the condition that, after the eight LEDs 100 constituting the first special symbol emit light in the light emission pattern during special fluctuation, the first special random number information acquired when the game ball is detected by the first special symbol starting means 102 is included in the When the received big hit judgment random value coincides with a predetermined big hit judgment value, the variation is stopped in the first big win mode, and in the other cases, the fluctuation is stopped in the first losing mode. When the stop symbol after the variation of the first special symbol display means 93 becomes the first jackpot mode, the first special profit state occurs.

The second special symbol display means (symbol display means) 94 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90 as shown in FIG. 9, and the second special symbol starting means 103 detects the game ball. On the condition that, after those eight LEDs 100 constituting the second special symbol emit light in the light emission pattern during special fluctuation, the second special random number information acquired when the game ball is detected by the second special symbol starting means 103 is included in the When the received big hit judgment random value coincides with a predetermined big hit judgment value, the variation is stopped in the second big win mode, and in the other cases, the variation is stopped in the second losing mode. When the stop symbol after the variation of the second special symbol display means 94 becomes the second jackpot mode, the second special profit state occurs.

The first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 are provided with one or more of the first and second jackpot modes and one or more of the first and second jackpot modes by combining the light emission mode (for example, lighting/extinguishing) of each of the eight LEDs 100. The second deviation mode can be displayed, and the special fluctuating light emission pattern switches, for example, a plurality of specific types (here, two types) of light emission modes at predetermined time intervals (eg, 128 ms).

Also, the first and second special symbols are started during the special holding period including during the symbol variation of the first special symbol display means 93, during the symbol variation of the second special symbol display means 94, and during the first and second special profit states. When the means 102 and 103 detect game balls, the first and second special random number information obtained thereby are retained and stored up to a predetermined upper limit retained number, for example, four each. Then, when the reserved memory on the side of the second special design is 1 or more when the special reserved period ends, one reserved memory of the second special design is digested to change the second special design, and the first special design is changed. When only the reserved memory on the side of the special design is 1 or more, one reserved memory of the first special design is digested to change the first special design. As described above, in this embodiment, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not fluctuating, and when both the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side have reserved memory, is to preferentially change the second special symbol.

The stored numbers (first and second special reserved numbers) of the first and second special random number information are notified to the player by the first and second special reserved number display means 95 and 96, the liquid crystal display means 106, and the like. be. Here, the first and second special reserved number display means 95 and 96 are each composed of two LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90 as shown in FIG. ), it is possible to display five kinds of first and second special reserved numbers from 0 to 4.

The big winning means 104 is an opening/closing type winning means having an opening/closing plate 119 capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can win and a closed state in which a game ball cannot win. , is arranged downstream of the second special symbol starting means 103 and upstream of the first special symbol starting means 102, and flows down the right flowing path 114b than the game ball that has flowed down the left flowing path 114a The game ball that has been played has a higher probability of winning. This big winning means 104 is the first special symbol that occurs when the first and second special symbols of the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 stop in the first and second big winning modes (specific modes) after the variation. , in the second special profit state, the opening/closing plate 119 is opened forward according to one or more kinds of opening patterns, and the game balls falling thereon are allowed to enter inside. When a game ball wins in the big winning means 104, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls per winning. In the following description, the first special profit state and the second special profit state are collectively referred to as "jackpot game" (special game).

A plurality of patterns such as 4R, 6R, and 10R are provided for the opening pattern of the big winning means 104 in the jackpot game. Each open pattern such as 4R, 6R, 10R is configured to perform so-called ball-out rounds 4 times, 6 times, and 10 times, respectively. Here, in the round with balls, after the big winning means 104 is opened, the number of winning prizes to the big winning means 104 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9) or when a predetermined time (for example, 28 seconds) elapses. It is set so as to close the big winning means 104, and if the player shoots to the right aiming at the big winning means 104 on the side of the right flow path 114b, the maximum number of game balls are easily won and a lot of prize balls are won. can be obtained. In addition to the rounds with paid out balls, an opening pattern having a round with no paid out balls that the big winning means 104 opens for a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) may be provided, or a round with no paid out balls may be provided. Only open patterns may be provided.

In addition, the liquid crystal display means 106 can variably display the effect symbol 120 in parallel with the variable display of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94. It is possible to display various images such as the first and second reserved images X1 to X4 and Y1 to Y4 indicating the second special reserved number, and the suspended image Z during fluctuation.

Here, the production pattern 120 has a plurality of pattern rows (here, three in the left-right direction) composed of a plurality of numbers and other patterns. 2, the pattern body 120a composed of numbers such as 1 to 8, etc., and a decoration part 120b such as characters attached to the pattern body 120a are combined. It is possible to arbitrarily change the display mode of the effect pattern 120, such as erasing the decorative portion 120b, enlarging or reducing it, and changing the display position.

The performance symbols 120, for example, start to fluctuate by vertical scrolling or the like for each symbol row according to a predetermined variation pattern approximately at the same time as the first and second special symbols start to fluctuate, and the stop symbols on a predetermined effective line are in a predetermined mode. For example, the first and second special symbols are stopped at the same time as the final stop. In the effect pattern 120, for example, when all the stop symbols on the effective line are the same, it is a big hit effect mode, and when it is not, it is a disappointing effect mode, and the first and second special symbols are the first and second big hit modes. In this case, the performance symbol 120 becomes a big hit performance mode, and when the first and second special symbols become the first and second loss modes, the performance symbol 120 becomes a loss performance mode.

Also, with respect to the first and second reserved images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4, and the suspended image Z during fluctuation, the first and second special symbol starting means 102 and 103 detect the game ball. 2. When the number of special reserved images increases, the first and second reserved images X1-, Y1- are additionally displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106, and the first and second special symbol display means 93, 94 are displayed. When the first and second special reserved numbers decrease based on the start of the new fluctuation of the first and second special symbols, for example, the suspended image Z during fluctuation is erased, and the first and second reserved images X1 to , Y1~ toward the front side of the queue (for example, the right side of the screen) by one piece at a time, and move the first and second pending images X1 and Y1 pushed out to, for example, a predetermined position to create a new change. The image Z is changed to the middle reserved image Z.

On the back side of the game board 16, as shown in FIG. 11, a back case 121 for supporting the liquid crystal display means 106 on the back side of the game board 16 is attached. A main board case 122 housing a board 122a, a sub board case 123 housing a sub control board 123a, and the like are detachably mounted.

In addition, on the back side of the front frame 3, a back cover 125 is detachably attached to cover the back side of the game board 16 in an openable and closable manner. A payout means 32 and a payout passage 127 are installed respectively, and when a game ball enters a winning opening of a big winning means 104 or the like, or when there is a ball lending command from an automatic ball lending machine (not shown), the game is played. A game ball in a ball tank 126a is put out by a putting-out means 32 through a tank rail 126b, and the game ball is guided to an upper tray 33 through a putting-out passage 127.例文帳に追加The rear cover 125 is arranged so as to cover substantially the entire sub-board case 123 and part of the upper side of the main board case 122 from the rear side.

A substrate mounting table 128 is detachably attached to the lower back side of the front frame 3. On the rear side of the substrate mounting table 128, a power supply board case 129 in which a power supply board 129a is stored, and a dispensing control board 130a. are detachably attached to the payout board case 130 in which is stored. For example, the power board case 129 is provided with a power switch 138 that can be turned on/off from the outside of the power board case 129 .

FIG. 12(a) is a schematic block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. In FIG. 12(a), a main control board (main control means) 122a comprehensively controls the game operation, and includes a game information display means 90 on the game board 16, a normal symbol starting means 101, a first special symbol starting means. Means 102, second special symbol starting means 103, big winning means 104, normal winning means 105, etc. are connected via, for example, a relay board (not shown), and a control command from the main control board 122a. A sub-control board (sub-control means) 123a that performs effect control such as image display, sound output, illumination light, movable body drive, etc. based on, payout control that controls payout means 32 based on control commands from the main control board 122a A board 130a and a firing control board 131 for controlling the firing means 17 based on a firing control signal or the like from the payout control board 130a are connected.

Operation means such as the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 and display means such as the performance information display means 137 are connected to the main control board 122a. As shown in FIG. 11, both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are operable from the outside of the main board case 122, and the performance information display means 137 is visible from the outside of the main board case 122. are mounted on the main control board 122a in the state of being in a state. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 132, the setting key switch 133, and the performance information display means 137 are all arranged at positions not covered by the back cover 125. FIG.

The RAM clear switch 132 is operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, and can be pressed from the outside of the main board case 122, and is configured to be OFF when not operated and ON when pressed. ing. The setting key switch 133 is operated to change settings, and can be switched ON/OFF by inserting, for example, a dedicated setting key into a keyhole from the outside of the main board case 122 and rotating it. It's becoming In this embodiment, by operating the setting key switch 133 or the like, a plurality of setting values corresponding to the probability of the first and second special symbols becoming a big hit mode (probability of winning in a random number lottery) can be set. It can be changed in steps (here, 6 steps from setting 1 to 6). The details of this setting change and the like will be described later.

The performance information display means 137 constitutes the setting display means 134 and the performance display means 135. For example, the performance information display means 137 is provided with four-digit 7-segment display portions 137a to 137d, and is visible through the transparent main board case 122. For example, it is attached to the main control board 122a in the main board case 122, functions as the setting display means 134 during the first period, and functions as the performance display means 135 during the second period different from the first period. It's becoming

The setting display means 134 displays setting information indicating a setting value (here, one of settings 1 to 6) in different display modes depending on whether the setting value is yet to be finalized. Any one of "1" to "6" and "1." to "6." corresponding to the settings 1 to 6 can be displayed on at least a part of the performance information display means 137, and is fixed during the setting change period. For example, the setting information corresponding to the previous setting value is "1" to "6" without dots. It is possible to display each with "1." to "6.". Of course, whether or not the set value has not been finalized may be expressed by a difference in display mode (for example, lighting/blinking) other than the presence or absence of dots, or setting information corresponding to the set value before and after finalization may be displayed in the same manner. It may be displayed in any form.

In this embodiment, among the four-digit 7-segment display portions 137a to 137d of the performance information display means 137, the 7-segment display portion 137d on the left end side in rear view, which is the closest from the front when the front frame 3 is opened, Although it is used as the setting display means 134, for example, the 7-segment display part 137a other than the 7-segment display part 137d may be used as the setting display means 134. A 7-segment display section with two or more digits such as , may be used as the setting display means .

The performance display means 135 displays a so-called base value on at least part of the performance information display means 137, for example, the 7-segment display sections 137a to 137d. The base value is an example of specific information obtained based on game performance, and is calculated, for example, by a formula of "(number of safes in low-probability state)/(number of outs in low-probability state) x 100". Note that the performance display means 135 of this embodiment can switch between and display a plurality of types of base values, for example, a real-time base value, a first cumulative base value, a second cumulative base value, and a third cumulative base value. . The real-time base value is a base value in real time during a unit measurement period until the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000). The first to third cumulative base values are cumulative base values in the unit measurement periods one to three times before, respectively. Of course, only real-time base values may be displayed, or one type, two types, or four or more types of accumulated base values may be displayed.

As described above, the RAM clear switch 132, the setting key switch 133, and the performance information display means 137 (the setting display means 134 and the performance display means 135) are all arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine body 1. Since it is necessary to unlock and open the front frame 3 in order to access, the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 cannot be operated by anyone other than those involved in the hall, and the performance information display means 137 ( The display contents of the setting display means 134 and the performance display means 135) cannot be seen either.

In this embodiment, the game information display means 90 and the performance information display means 137 are driven and controlled mainly by a dynamic lighting method. As shown in FIG. 13, the LED common port of the main control board 122a can output a 1-byte dynamic lighting common C0-C7 scanning signal. The lines of the dynamic lighting commons C4 to C7 are connected to the LED groups 90a to 90d of the display means 90 and the 7-segment display portions 137a to 137d of the performance information display means 137, respectively.

In addition, 1-byte dynamic lighting data D10 to D17 and D20 to D27 can be output from the LED data ports 0 and 1 of the main control board 122a, respectively. Lines of the dynamic lighting data D20 to D27 of the LED data port 1 are connected to the LED groups 90a to 90d of the information display means 90 and to the 7-segment display portions 137a to 137d of the performance information display means 137, respectively.

The sub-control board 123a includes various effects means to be controlled, such as a liquid crystal display means (display means) 106, speakers (audio output means) 18 and 25, a first frame movable body 26, a second frame movable body 27, a fan In addition to means 28, illumination means 136, movable effect means 42, vibration generating means 43, first board movable body 107, second board movable body 108, third board movable body 109, etc., effect buttons that can be operated by the player 41, various operation means such as cross operation means 38, sound volume operation means 39, light quantity operation means 40, side unit connection detection means 139 and the like are connected. The illumination means 136 is composed of a large number of LEDs (not shown) arranged on the front frame 3 side and the game board 16 side. The side unit connection detection means 139 detects the connection state of the side unit 30, and is turned ON when the side unit 30 is properly mounted and connected to the front frame 3, and turned OFF otherwise. is configured to

A volume control knob (first operation means, second operation means) 140 is connected to the sub-control board 123a. The volume adjustment knob 140 is used by hall personnel to select the volume, and can be switched between a plurality of levels (here, 10 levels corresponding to the hall setting values T0 to T9, see FIGS. 28 and 31). It is composed of a rotary switch, and as shown in FIG. As described above, the volume control knob 140 is arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1, and in order to operate it, it is necessary to unlock and open the front frame 3. Therefore, it can be operated by anyone other than those involved in the hall. I can't.

Incidentally, the sound volume adjusting operation means provided on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 may be any means as long as it can be switched in a plurality of steps, and may be a DIP switch or the like. In this embodiment, the back cover 125 covers the rear side of the sub-board case 123 as shown in FIG. By providing a notch or an opening corresponding to the volume adjustment knob 140 in the back cover 125, the volume adjustment knob 140 may be operated while the back cover 125 is closed.

Next, power-on processing (FIGS. 15 and 16) executed in the main control board 122a when power is turned on will be described. In this power-on process (FIGS. 15 and 16), interrupts such as timer interrupts are disabled (S1), the stack pointer within the area is set (S2), and the built-in WDT (Watchdog Timer) is activated. It starts up (S3) and clears the firing control signal output port (S4).

Next, the start waiting process (S5 to S8) of the sub-control board 123a is executed. That is, a value corresponding to the sub-board startup waiting time (for example, 2 seconds) is set in a predetermined register (S5), and subtraction processing is performed until the value becomes 0, that is, until the sub-board startup waiting time elapses (S6). ) and the WDT clearing process (S7) are repeatedly executed.

When the sub-board start-up waiting time has passed (S8:=0), a power failure signal monitoring process (S9 to S11) is executed to wait until the power failure signal is turned off. That is, the power failure signal output from the power supply substrate 129a is read twice (S9), and it is determined whether or not the levels of the two power failure signals match (S10). If the levels do not match (S10: No), the process returns to S9. Even if the levels match (S10: Yes), if the power failure signal is ON (S11: Yes), the process returns to S9. (S11).

When the power failure signal is turned off (S11: No), the protection and prohibition areas of the RAM are invalidated (S12), and the work area is initialized (S13). Here, for example, the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared, and the initial value of 01H is set to the system operation status. Also, a standby screen display command (BA08H) is transmitted to the sub-control board 123a (S14). When the sub-control board 123a receives the standby screen display command (BA08H), for example, the liquid crystal display means 106 displays "Please Wait" or the like. Then, the payout control board 130a is started normally and waits while clearing the WDT until the power-on signal from the payout control board 130a is turned ON (S15, S16).

Then, the process proceeds to S17 to S44. The processing of S17 to S44 includes a "setting change" that executes a setting change process (S20) and a RAM clear process (S21 to S24), and a RAM clear process (S21 to S24) without executing the setting change process (S20). "RAM Clear" to execute "Setting Confirmation" to execute setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) and backup restoration processing (S41), backup restoration processing (S41) without executing setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) , and "RAM abnormality", which executes the power-on waiting process (S27 to S29).

Of these five types of processing modes, four types other than "RAM abnormality" are the ON/OFF state of the setting key switch 133, the ON/OFF state of the RAM clear switch 132, and the opening of the door (front frame 3). / is selected according to the closed state combination.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, when both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are ON, "setting change" is selected in principle, the RAM clear switch 132 is ON, and the setting key switch 133 is ON. is OFF, "RAM clear" is selected, but even if both the setting key switch 133 and RAM clear switch 132 are ON, "RAM clear" is selected instead of "setting change" when the door is closed. is selected. Similarly, when the RAM clear switch 132 is OFF and the setting key switch 133 is ON, in principle "setting check" is selected, and when both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are OFF, "backup However, even if the RAM clear switch 132 is OFF and the setting key switch 133 is ON, when the door is closed, "backup restore" is selected instead of "setting check". there is

As described above, in the present embodiment, the situation in which the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are ON even though the door (front frame 3) is not open is suspected of fraudulent activity. Regarding "setting change" and "setting confirmation", the door is opened as a condition, and if the door is closed, the setting change process (S20) is not executed "RAM clear", setting confirmation process (S33 to S40) are not executed "Backup restore" is to be selected. "RAM clear" and "backup restore", which are not related to the setting change function, are conditional only on the ON/OFF state of the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133, not the open/closed state of the door.

In S17 and S18, level data relating to each signal of the RAM clear switch 132 and setting key switch 133 are acquired and saved in the work area (S17), and each signal of the door opening switch 84, RAM clear switch 132 and setting key switch 133 are acquired. (hereinafter referred to as door open signal, RAM clear switch signal, setting key switch signal) is acquired (S18).

Then, based on these three signals, it is determined whether or not to select "setting change" as the processing mode (S19). That is, if the door open signal, the RAM clear switch signal, and the setting key switch signal are all ON (S19: Yes), the process proceeds to the setting change process (S20) (see FIG. 14).

In the setting change process (S20), as shown in FIG. 17, first, a setting change start command (BA76H) indicating that the setting change period has started is transmitted (S51). When the sub-control board 123a receives the setting change start command (BA76H), for example, the liquid crystal display means 106 displays "setting change in progress" or the like.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (S52). This is so that if a power failure occurs during the setting change period, it will be determined that there is a backup abnormality in S26 (FIG. 16), which will be described later, when the power is turned on next time. Also, 02H is set in the system operation status (S53). Note that the initial value of the system operation status is 01H (see S13 in FIG. 15).

Subsequently, the set value data is read from the set value work area of the RAM and set as a set work value in, for example, the W register (S54). In this embodiment, any one of settings 1 to 6 can be selected as a setting value, and any one of 0 to 5 is stored in the setting value work area on the RAM according to the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). setting value data is stored. Therefore, if the value of the set value work area is normal, the set work value of the W register will be any one of 0-5.

Next, the set working value of the W register is compared with the set maximum value (here, 5) (S55), and if the set work value is greater than the set maximum value (S56: Yes), the set work value of the W register is set to 0 (S57). As a result, when there is an abnormality in the set value data, 0 corresponding to the set 1 can be forcibly set as the set work value.

Subsequently, the security signal output from the external output terminal is set to ON (S58), and the output to the LED common port is cleared (S59). Then, the display pattern data corresponding to the set work value (value of the W register) at that time is output to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13) (S60), and the 7-segment display section 137d (setting display means 134) The corresponding LED common port is set to ON (S61). As a result, one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the 7-segment display section 137d according to the set work value (0 to 5) at that time.

Also, a 4 ms wait process (S62) is executed to provide a waiting time of 4 ms. This is because a waiting time of 4 ms is provided here to see whether or not there is a change in each signal in order to create edge data for the RAM clear switch signal and the setting key switch signal in S64, which will be described later.

Subsequently, a power supply abnormality check process (S63) is executed. In this power supply abnormality check process (S63), as shown in FIG. 18, first, the power supply abnormality signal transmitted from the power supply board 129a is read twice (S71). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power failure signals read twice match (S72). If the levels do not match (S72: No), the process returns to S71. ), it is determined whether or not the power failure signal is ON (S73). If the power failure signal is not ON (normal) (S73: No), the value of the power failure confirmation counter is cleared (S74), and the power failure check process ends.

On the other hand, if the power failure signal is ON (S73: Yes), the value of the power failure confirmation counter is incremented (S75), and whether the value of the power failure confirmation counter after the increment has reached, for example, 2 is determined. is determined (S76). If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is less than 2 (S76: No), the power supply abnormality check process is terminated.

When the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter has reached 2 in S76 (S76: Yes), it is determined that the power supply is abnormal, and a power supply shutdown command (BA33H, BA55H) is transmitted (S77), and the setting change process is not being performed. On this condition, the backup flag is set to ON (=AA55H) (S78, S79). As a result, the backup flag remains OFF (=0000H) when power failure occurs during the setting change process. It should be noted that whether or not the setting change process is in progress can be determined by the system operation status.

Then, the RAM protection is enabled and the prohibited area is disabled (S80). This prohibits data from being written to the RAM in subsequent processing. In addition, output ports such as external terminal ports, sub-ports, solenoid ports, LED common ports, and LED data ports are cleared (S81), timer interrupts are disabled (S82), and infinite loop processing is repeated while clearing WDT. It waits until the power supply voltage drops and the CPU becomes non-operating (S83).

Returning to the setting change process in FIG. 17, the description continues. Following the power supply abnormality check process (S63), the edge data of the RAM clear switch signal and the setting key switch signal are created (S64), and it is determined whether or not the setting change end condition is satisfied, ie, the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal. is detected (S65), and if the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is not detected (S65: No), it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed, that is, the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal. is detected (S66). As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 132 is also used for the setting change operation, and in S66, when the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is detected, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed. ing.

When the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is detected in S66 (S66: Yes), the setting work value of the W register is incremented (S67) and the process proceeds to S55. In S55 to S57, if the set work value after the increment is greater than the set maximum value of 5, the set work value is updated to zero. As described above, in this embodiment, every time a setting change operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 132) is performed during the setting change period, the setting work value change processing of S55 to S57 is executed, thereby The setting work value is cyclically changed in the range of 0-5.

Following the processing of S55 to S57, the processing from S58 onwards is performed. Further, when the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is not detected in S66 (S66: No), the processing after S58 is performed. Since the processing of S58 to S64 has already been explained, the explanation is omitted here, but by this processing, the display of the setting display means 134 also changes according to the change of the setting work value.

As described above, in the setting change process shown in FIG. 17, as long as the setting key switch 133 is ON, when the setting change operation is performed by the RAM clear switch 132, the processes of S55 to S64 are executed. If not, the processes of S58 to S64 are repeatedly executed. Then, when the setting key switch 133 is switched from ON to OFF and the setting change end condition is satisfied (S65: Yes), the setting change period ends, and the setting work value of the W register is stored in the setting value work area. (S68). As a result, the provisional setting work value changed by operating the RAM clear switch 132 during the setting change period is determined as the setting value data.

Subsequently, the 7-segment display section 137d (setting display means 134) performs a setting confirmation display indicating that the setting value has been confirmed (S69). In this setting confirmation display, one of "1." to "6." is displayed corresponding to the confirmed set value data (any of 0 to 5). That is, by adding ". (dot)" to "1" to "6" without dots that have been displayed until then, it is notified that the set value has been determined. The setting confirmation display on the 7-segment display section 137d (setting display means 134) is performed by turning ON the LED common port corresponding to the 7-segment display section 137d and also by turning on "1." 6.” is output to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13).

Also, a setting change end command indicating that the setting change period has ended is transmitted (S70), and the setting change process ends. This setting change end command reflects the determined set value data, and one of the setting change end commands BA70H to BA75H is transmitted according to the set value data.

Returning to the power-on process of FIGS. 15 and 16, the description continues. When the setting change process (S20) ends, the RAM clear process (S21 to S24) is performed. That is, first, a specific range of the work area (RAM within the area) is initialized (S21), and initial values (30 seconds) are set for the RAM clear notification timer and the security signal timer (S22, S23). Initial values are set in part of the RAM (S24).

When the above RAM clear processing (S21 to S24) is completed, the common processing (S42 to S44) that is commonly performed in the four types of processing mode except "RAM abnormality" is performed. In this common processing, various command transmission processing (S42), game state notification information update processing (S43), internal register initial setting processing (S44), and the like are performed. In the command transmission process of S42, first, an initialize command (BA01H) is transmitted, and in the case of "setting change" or "RAM clear", a RAM clear command (BA02H) or the like is transmitted, and "setting confirmation" or "backup restore" is transmitted. In the case of , 1st and 2nd special reserved number designation commands (B0xxH, B1xxH) based on the values of the 1st and 2nd special reserved numbers, set value command (F6xxH) based on set value data, state designation based on game state Send commands (FAxxH to FDxxH) and the like.

Also, in the internal register initial setting process (S44), for example, the system operation status is set to 00H, and the firing control signal is set to ON. As a result, the game ball can be shot by the shooting means 17 .

Returning to S19 of FIG. 15, the description continues. If at least one of the door open signal, RAM clear switch signal and setting key switch signal is not ON in S19 (S19: No), the process proceeds to RAM abnormality determination processing (S25). In this RAM abnormality determination process (S25), setting value data is obtained from the setting value work area of the internal RAM, and the setting value data is compared with the maximum setting value (here, 5 corresponding to setting 6). If the set value data is larger than the set maximum value (S25: No), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the process proceeds to the power re-on waiting process (S27 to S29).

If the RAM is not abnormal (S25: Yes), the process proceeds to backup abnormality determination processing (S26). In this backup abnormality determination process (S26), it is determined whether or not the backup flag is normal (ON). S29).

As described above, the backup flag is cleared (S52) in the setting change process (FIG. 17), and if a power supply abnormality is detected in the power supply abnormality check process (FIG. 18), the backup flag is cleared only when the setting change process is not in progress. is set to ON (=AA55H), if a power failure occurs during the setting change period, the backup abnormality determination process (S26) determines that there is a backup abnormality when the power is turned on next time. , power re-on waiting processing (S27 to S29) is executed.

In the power re-on waiting process (S27 to S29), first, a RAM error command (BA7FH) is transmitted (S27). When the sub-control board 123a receives the RAM error command (BA7FH), the liquid crystal display means 106 displays, for example, "RAM error, turn on the power again and set the setting to 1".

Then, an error display (S28) on the 7-segment display section 137d (setting display means 134) and power failure check processing (S29) are infinitely repeated to wait for the power to be turned on again. The error display in S28 is performed by turning ON the LED common port corresponding to the 7-segment display section 137d and outputting the display pattern data corresponding to "E" to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13). will be

As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of a RAM abnormality or a backup abnormality, the system is configured to forcibly turn on the power again by shifting to the power-on waiting state. In addition, when the power reactivation waiting process (S27 to S29) is executed due to a RAM abnormality, at least one of the door open signal, RAM clear switch signal and setting key switch signal is not ON in S19 when the power is reactivated next time. Then, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal or the backup is abnormal again, and the process of waiting for re-turning on the power (S27 to S29) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again after waiting for the power to be turned on again, the door (front frame 3) is opened and both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are turned on to perform the setting change process (S20). ) is executed, and the setting value must be set to an arbitrary value from settings 1 to 6. Of course, in this case, even if the set value is not set to an arbitrary value among the set values 1 to 6 by operating the RAM clear switch 132, if the set value is abnormal, the set work value is set to 1 in S55 to S57. Since the corresponding 0 is forcibly set, after executing the setting change process, the setting key switch 133 is switched from ON to OFF without setting the setting value to an arbitrary value among settings 1 to 6. Thus, the setting change end condition is satisfied (S65: Yes), the setting change period ends, and the setting work value of the W register is stored in the setting value work area, thereby recovering from the RAM abnormal state.

Returning to S25 and S26, the description continues. If it is determined in S25 and S26 that there is neither a RAM abnormality nor a backup abnormality, the process proceeds to RAM clear branch determination processing (S30). This RAM clear branch determination process (S30) determines whether or not to select the "RAM clear" processing mode. If the RAM clear switch signal is ON (S30: Yes), the "RAM clear" When the processing mode is selected, the RAM clearing process (S21 to S24) is started (see FIG. 14), and if the RAM clear switch signal is not ON (S30: No), the setting confirmation branch determination process (S31, S32) is started. do. The RAM clear processing (S21 to S24) has already been explained.

The setting confirmation branch determination process (S31, S32) is for determining which of the processing modes of "setting confirmation" and "backup restoration" is to be selected. ), if both of these signals are ON (S32: Yes), the processing mode of "setting confirmation" is selected and the setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) is performed; otherwise (S32: No), When the "backup restore" processing mode is selected, the setting confirmation process (S33 to S40) is skipped, and the backup restore process (S41) is performed (see FIG. 14).

In the setting confirmation process (S33 to S40), first, a setting value command indicating that the setting confirmation period has started is transmitted (S33). The set value data is reflected in this set value command, and one of the set value commands BA60H to BA65H is transmitted according to the set value data. When the sub-control board 123a receives the set value command (BA6xH), the liquid crystal display means 106 displays, for example, "Confirming setting".

Also, the initial value (30 seconds) is set to the security signal timer (S34), and the security signal output from the external output terminal is set to ON (S35). Here, the subtraction of the security signal timer is executed in the timer management process (S93) of the 4ms timer interrupt process. That is, the security signal is always ON and output from the external output terminal during the setting confirmation process, and the security signal is output from the external output terminal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation process ends. Then, a setting value display process (S36) for displaying the setting value on the 7-segment display section 137d (setting display means 134) is executed. This set value display process (S36) turns ON the LED common port corresponding to the 7-segment display section 137d, and displays display pattern data indicating any one of "1." to "6." according to the set value. This is done by outputting to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13).

Also, a 4 ms wait process (S37) for setting a waiting time of 4 ms is executed, and then a power supply abnormality check process (S38) is executed. The 4ms wait process (S37) and the power failure check process (S38) are the same as the 4ms wait process (S62) and the power failure check process (S63) of the setting change process (FIG. 17) already described.

Subsequently, edge data of the setting key switch signal is created (S39), and it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation end condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is detected (S40). The processing of S35 to S39 is repeated until the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is detected in S40.

When the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is detected in S40 (S40: Yes), the setting confirmation period is ended, and the backup restoration process (S41) is performed. In the backup restoration process (S41), a partial area of the internal RAM, such as a backup flag work area and an error-related work area, is initialized. After the backup restoration process (S41), the above-described common process (S42 to S44) is performed.

When the processing of S17 to S44 is completed, the main loop processing (S45 to S48) is performed. In this main loop process, interrupts are prohibited (S45), various random numbers are updated (S46), performance display monitor processing (S47) is executed, and then interrupts are permitted (S48). do. As a result, the timer interrupt process is called and executed at intervals of 4 ms, for example.

Here, the performance display monitor processing (S47) is for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display means 135. During the unit measurement period until the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000), the unit A real-time base value is calculated by counting the number of safes in low-probability states and the number of outs in low-probability states during the measurement period, and dividing the former by the latter. In addition, it is necessary to always count the "safe number in low probability state" and "out number in low probability state". You can do it accordingly. Also, when the unit measurement period ends, the real-time base value at that time becomes the new first cumulative base value, and the first and second cumulative base values up to that point become the new second and third cumulative base values, respectively. Become.

Next, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) of the main control board 122a will be described. In this timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), first, a power failure check process (S91) is executed. This power supply abnormality check process (S91) is common to the power supply abnormality check process shown in FIG. 18 already described.

Following the power failure check process (S91), input management process (S92), timer management process (S93), timer interrupt random number management process (S94), error management process (S95), prize ball management process (S96) ).

The input management process (S92) manages information detected by various sensors such as game ball detection means and operation means provided in each winning means. do. Also, here, the winning means in which the game ball has won is grasped based on the input data relating to the winning detection information, and the value of the winning counter corresponding to each winning means is updated.

The timer management process (S93) manages timers used for game control, and decrements the values of various timers by one until they reach zero. It should be noted that the types of timers handled in this timer management process include, in addition to the already-mentioned RAM clear notification timer and security signal timer, a normal symbol timer, a normal electric accessory timer, a special symbol timer, and a special electric accessory timer. , magnetic error notification timer, radio wave error notification timer, winning port error notification timer, normal electric accessory winning timer, normal electric accessory operating timer for test signal, etc.

The timer interrupt random number management process (S94) manages the random numbers associated with each pattern variation, and includes update processing (adding 1) to each random number counter and processing to change the start value of the random number counter every cycle. and

Also, the error management process (S95) manages various errors, and monitors the occurrence of errors based on input data from various sensors and status signals from the payout control board 130a. , transmission of an error command to the sub-control board 123a, and other error processing.

The prize ball management process (S96) manages the prize balls, confirms the prize counter managed by the input management process (S92), and designates the number of prize balls if there is a prize. A payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 130a. The payout control board 130a that receives the payout control command controls the payout means 32 based on the number of prize balls information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Following the prize ball management process (S96), a normal symbol management process (S97), a normal electric auditors management process (S98), a special symbol management process (S99), and a special electric auditors management process (S100) are executed. .

The normal design management process (S97) manages the fluctuation of the normal design by the normal design display means 91, and based on the detection of the game ball by the normal design starter means 101, the normal random number information such as the hit determination random value is displayed. is acquired, and the normal random number information is stored in a first-in first-out storage area with a predetermined upper limit pending number (for example, 4) as a limit, and the normal symbol display means 91 becomes a state in which variable display is possible and one or more On the condition that the normal random number information is stored (the number of normal reserved numbers is 1 or more), the top hit determination random value is extracted from the queue of the normal random number information, and the hit determination random value is predetermined. Hit/lose judgment (hit judgment) is performed according to whether or not it matches the hit judgment value, and based on the hit judgment result, the stop pattern and the fluctuation time after the fluctuation of the normal pattern are selected, and the normal pattern is selected. The normal pattern is changed by the display means 91 .

In addition, the normal electric accessary product management process (S98) manages the normal profit state that opens the second special symbol starting means 103, and the normal symbol display means 91 When the stop pattern after the variation of the normal electric accessory to drive the opening and closing part 118 so as to change the opening and closing part 118 of the second special symbol starting means 103 to the open state according to the predetermined opening and closing pattern. Solenoid control data setting processing for the solenoid is performed.

The special symbol management process (S99) manages the variation of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94, and the first and second special symbol starting means 102 and 103 Based on the detection of the game ball, first and second special random number information consisting of a jackpot judgment random number, a jackpot pattern random number, and other random numbers are obtained, and the first and second special random number information are predetermined. The upper limit pending number (for example, 4 each) is stored in the first-in first-out storage area as a limit, and when the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 are in a state where variable display is possible, the second special If the reserved number is 1 or more, the head of the jackpot determination random number is taken out from the queue of the second special random number information, and if only the first special reserved number is 1 or more, the head of the jackpot judgment random number is taken out from the queue of the first special random number information, Big hit judgment processing (random number lottery processing regarding whether or not to generate first and second special profit states (profit states) advantageous to the player) for judging big hit/loss by random number lottery using the big win judgment random value. is executed, according to the big hit determination result, the stop pattern mode of the first and second special patterns, the variation pattern of the effect pattern, etc. are determined, and the first and second special pattern display means 93 and 94 , to change the second special symbol.

Also, in the special symbol management process, it is possible to execute a prefetch determination process. In this look-ahead determination process, the first and second special random number information acquired when the game ball wins the first and second special symbol starting means 102 and 103 are given a predetermined number before being subjected to symbol variation. Timing, for example, at the time of acquisition of the first and second special random number information, pre-reading determination is performed for the big hit determination random number value etc. included in the first and second special random number information. It should be noted that the main control board 122a functions as a prefetch determination means by executing this prefetch determination process.

For example, when the first and second special reservation numbers increase, a reservation addition command corresponding to the result of prefetching determination is transmitted to the sub-control board 123a, and when starting the variation of the first and second special symbols , a pending subtraction command, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern, and a stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol are transmitted to the sub-control board 123a, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern from the start of variation of the first and second special symbols. When the variation of the first and second special symbols is stopped after the elapse, a variation stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 123a. Also, when the variation of the first and second special symbols is completed and both the first and second special reserved numbers are 0 at that time, a waiting-for-customer command (BA04H) is transmitted to the sub-control board 123a.

Here, there are two types of jackpot probabilities, low probability and high probability, which are set to high probability during the variable probability state of the special game states to be described later, and to low probability otherwise. In addition, in this embodiment, the set value can be changed in six steps from setting 1 to 6, and the jackpot probability (low probability and high probability) changes in six steps according to the set value. The big hit probability is higher, for example, as the set value is larger.

Variation patterns of the performance pattern 120 include a normal variation pattern in which a ready-to-win state is not established and a losing mode, a ready-to-win/big win variation pattern in which a losing mode or a big-hit mode is achieved through a ready-to-win state, and the like. A plurality of normal fluctuation patterns are provided, for example, with different fluctuation times. Also, with regard to the reach loss/jackpot variation pattern, there are types such as a normal reach loss/jackpot variation pattern in which the reach production after the reach is established ends with a normal reach production, and a super reach loss/jackpot variation pattern in which the normal reach production shifts to a super reach production. Further, a plurality of types with different variation time and effect content are provided for each type of each reach variation pattern.

In the special pattern management process, when the result of judging the big win is a big win, the big win is selected from a plurality of types such as normal 4R, variable probability 6R, etc. based on the random number value of the big win pattern. A plurality of types of jackpots are provided according to, for example, the type of jackpot game (type of opening pattern) and the type of special game state that occurs after the jackpot game ends. For example, "Normal 4R" is a jackpot that generates a time-saving state after the jackpot game by the opening pattern of 4R is completed, and the production pattern 120 is, for example, a normal jackpot mode consisting of even-numbered patterns, and during the jackpot game, for example, there are balls. 4 rounds are to be performed. Also, for example, "variable probability 6R" is a big hit that generates a variable probability state after the end of the big win game by the opening pattern of 6R, and the production pattern 120 becomes a probability variable big win mode consisting of odd number patterns, for example, during the big win game. Six rounds of ants are to be played.

During the time saving state, for example, the variation times of the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 are switched to a shortened variation time shorter than the normal variation time with respect to the first and second special symbols, and the probability of winning with respect to the normal symbols. is from normal probability to high probability, the fluctuation time is from normal fluctuation time to shortened fluctuation time, the opening and closing pattern of the second special symbol starting means 103 in the normal profit state is from the normal opening and closing pattern (for example, 0.2 seconds × 1 time open) It can be switched to a special opening/closing pattern (for example, opening 2 seconds x 3 times). The time saving state starts when the big win game ends, and ends when, for example, the first and second special symbols fluctuate a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or when the next big win game occurs by then.

Also, during the variable probability state, for example, in addition to switching similar to the time saving state, the probability of a big hit is switched from a low probability to a high probability. Incidentally, the variable probability state starts when the big hit game ends, and ends when the next big hit game occurs, for example.

Next, a specific processing procedure of the big hit determination process in the special symbol management process (S99) will be described based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 20 and the big hit determination table shown in FIG. 21(a). In this big-hit determination process, when the acquired big-hit determination random number is within a predetermined range defined in the big-hit determination table, the winning is won. The main control board 122a functions as determination means for determining whether or not to generate a profit state by executing this big hit determination process.

In the big hit determination process (FIG. 20), first, a big hit determination random number is acquired (S111), and depending on whether the special symbol that starts to change is the first/second special symbol, the big hit corresponding to the special symbol is selected. The address of the determination table is acquired (S112). Here, since the big hit probability is the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, when there is no small hit or when the small hit probability is the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern A common jackpot determination table may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, a pachinko machine with no small hits is exemplified, but the big hit determination processing will be described using the big hit determination table in the case where there is a small hit shown in FIG. 21(a).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21(a) includes “lower limit of jackpot determination value” (lower limit information), “upper limit of jackpot determination value at low probability” (upper limit information), “high probability jackpot determination value Upper limit of "(upper limit information), "lower limit of small hit judgment value" (lower limit information), "upper limit of small hit judgment value" (upper limit information), "upper limit of big hit judgment random number" 6 It consists of first to sixth information groups for defining the type of range defining information. In the case of a pachinko machine with no small hits, the fourth and fifth information groups relating to the small hit determination value may be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), each information group includes first information indicating whether or not the determination value is different for each setting value (any of settings 1 to 6), and range It consists of the second information indicating the regulation information, and the third information indicating the value of the big hit flag (low probability/high probability) and the value of the small hit flag.

In the first information, 01H is set when the determination value differs for each set value, and 00H is set otherwise. The value of the range defining information described above is set in the second information, but the number of the second information differs depending on, for example, the first information. There is one (range defining information), and if the first information is 01H, the second information is provided for the number of types of set values (here, six types). In the third information, either 00H/5AH is set for each of the low-probability jackpot flag, the high-probability jackpot flag, and the small hit flag.

In addition, the second information (lower limit information) in the first information group that defines the "lower limit of the big hit determination value" is not the value of the lower limit of the big hit determination value as it is, but a value obtained by subtracting 1 from that value is set. ing. Similarly, the second information (lower limit information) in the fourth information group that defines the "lower limit of the small hit judgment value" is not the value as it is, but the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value is set.

FIG. 22 shows the distribution of judgment values in the jackpot judgment table shown in FIG. ing. The difference between setting 1 and setting 6 is only the upper limit of the jackpot at low probability and the upper limit of jackpot at high probability, both of which are larger in setting 6 than in setting 1. .

Following S112, the first information indicating whether or not the determination value differs for each set value is acquired from the big hit determination table (S113), and the address is set to the top address of the second information storing the next determination value. change (S114). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained first information is 00H (S115), and if the first information is 00H (S115:=0), range definition information (second information) is obtained from the current address. However (S118), if the first information is not 00H (S115: ≠ 0), the set value data (one of 0 to 5) is acquired (S116), and the set value data is offset to change the address. After that (S117), range definition information (second information) is acquired from the address (S118).

In the case of the first information group of the big hit determination table shown in FIG. 21(a), the first information is 00H and the second information is only one common to all set values, so S116 and S117 are skipped. At S118, this one piece of second information (lower limit of jackpot determination value -1) is acquired. In the case of the second information group, the first information is 01H, and the second information (upper limit information) is provided in six types corresponding to settings 1 to 6 (specific range definition information). If the set value data (0 to 5) is offset, for example, if the setting is 1, the first second information is obtained with offset = 0, and if the setting is 6, the sixth second information is obtained with offset = 5. (S117, S118).

When the second information (range defining information) is acquired in S118, the value of the second information is compared with the big hit determination random number value acquired in S111 (S119, S120). Then, until it is determined in S120 that the big hit determination random number value is equal to or less than the value of the second information (S120: Yes), the above-described processing of S113 to S120 is sequentially executed for each information group in the big hit determination table. .

While repeating the processing of S113 to S120, when it is determined that the jackpot determination random number value is equal to or less than the value of the second information in S120 (S120: Yes), the third information in the information group, ie, the low probability jackpot flag , each value of the high-probability big hit flag and the small hit flag is acquired (S121), and the big hit determination process ends.

When using the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21(a), for example, if the jackpot determination random value is 9000, the jackpot determination random value (9000) is the second information (10000 in this case) in S120 targeting the first information group. ) is determined to be less than or equal to That is, since the big hit determination random number value is smaller than the lower limit value of the big hit determination value, the big hit determination result is a failure (see FIGS. 22(a) and (b)). 00H is set to all of the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Also, for example, if the jackpot determination random value is 11700 and the set value is 6 (setting 6), the jackpot determination random value (11700) is the second information (here, set to 6) in S120 for the third information group. corresponding 12000) or less. That is, since the big hit determination random number value is greater than the lower limit value of the big hit determination value and less than the high probability upper limit value, the big hit determination result is a high probability big hit (see FIG. 22(b)), and in S121 the high probability time. 5AH is set to the big hit flag, and 00H is set to the low probability big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Also, for example, if the big hit determination random number value is 19000, it is determined in S120 for the fourth information group that the big hit determination random number value (19000) is equal to or less than the second information (here, 20000). That is, since the big hit determination random number value is larger than the high probability upper limit value of the big hit determination value and smaller than the lower limit value of the small hit determination value, the result of the big hit determination is lost (Fig. 22 (a), (b) See), in S121, 00H is set to all of the low-probability big-hit flag, the high-probability big-hit flag and the small-hit flag.

As described above, in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 21(a)) of the present embodiment, the specific range definition information (the upper limit of the low-probability jackpot determination value, the high-probability jackpot determination value (upper limit) is provided in correspondence with the set value, and in the big hit determination process (Fig. 20), based on the offset according to the set value, specific range stipulation information is acquired from the big hit determination table It is configured.

By the way, although the pachinko machine in which the set value can be changed in six steps is exemplified in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 20 can also correspond to a pachinko machine in which the set value is set in only one step. That is, in the present embodiment, a program for judging a big hit is used for a model in which the setting value can be changed in multiple stages (there are multiple stages of setting values) and a model in which the setting value cannot be changed (the setting value is only in one stage). can be made common.

When executing the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 20 with a model having only one set value, the big-hit determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 23, for example. The big hit determination table (for setting 1 stage) shown in FIG. 23 differs from the big hit determination table (for setting 6 stages) shown in FIG. The only difference is that a dummy data group is provided after the (shaded portion in FIG. 23).

That is, in the second and third information groups of the big hit determination table (for setting 1 stage) shown in FIG. Only one piece of second information (specific range defining information) is set. In the big hit determination process (FIG. 20) of this embodiment, when the first information is 01H (S115: ≠ 0), the set value data (any of 0 to 5) is acquired (S116), and the set value data After changing the address as an offset (S117), the second information (specific range defining information) is acquired from that address (S118). Since 0 is set in the value data, in the repeated processing of S113 to S120 targeting the second and third information groups, the first (that is, the only) second information (specific range stipulated information) is acquired (S117, S118), it is possible to normally execute the big hit determination process.

In addition, in the big hit determination table (for setting 1 stage) shown in FIG. 23, in order to make the data size the same as the big hit determination table (for setting 6 stages) shown in FIG. A dummy data group having a data amount (2 bytes.times.5.times.2) corresponding to the second information corresponding to settings 2 to 6 omitted in the second and third information groups is provided.

As for the big hit determination table shown in FIG. 23, even if the first information of the second and third information groups is changed to 00H, the big hit determination process (FIG. 20) is executed normally, and the determination result does not change. . However, in this case, there is a problem that S116 and S117 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 20) are not executed at all (unused programs exist). That is, in this case, even if it seems that a common jackpot determination processing program is used for a model that can change the setting value in multiple stages and a model that has only one stage of setting value, the setting value is only one stage. Since unused programs exist when used in different models, it cannot be said that the big hit judging processing programs used in both models are substantially the same.

In addition, in the above-mentioned model having only one stage of setting values, the setting value data stored in the setting value work area of the RAM is only one such as 0, but the setting display means 134 (7-segment The display unit 137d) not only displays the setting information corresponding to the setting value data but also displays an error such as "E". In this way, the setting display means 134 can display information other than the setting information, so it is possible to confirm whether the setting display means 134 is operating normally.

The special electric role product management process (S100) manages a big win game that opens the big winning means 104, the result of the big win determination is a big win, and after the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 change. Solenoid control for a big winning opening solenoid for driving the opening/closing plate 119 of the big winning means 104 so that the opening/closing plate 119 of the big winning means 104 is changed to an open state according to a predetermined opening pattern when the stopped pattern becomes a big hit mode (specific mode). Data setting processing is performed. In addition, the main control board 122a functions as profit state generating means for generating a big hit game (profit state) by executing this special electric auditors management process (S100).

Following the special electric accessary product management process (S100), the right-handed information management process (S101) performs necessary processing for performing right-handed notification and the like. The right-handed notification is for notifying that it is a right-handed advantageous period (for example, during a jackpot game and during a special game state) in which so-called right-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. Of course, not only the notification of hitting to the right, but also the notification of hitting to the left, which notifies that it is a period in which hitting to the left is advantageous for the player, may be executed.

Next, LED management processing (S102) is performed. This LED management processing (S102) is for managing light emission of LEDs constituting the game information display means 90, performance display means 135 (performance information display means 137), etc. As shown in FIG. and clear the LED data port (S131), and update (increment) the LED output counter (S132). Then, common data corresponding to the value of the LED output counter is selected from the LED common output selection table (FIG. 25) (S133), and the common data is output to the LED common port (S134).

In the LED common output selection table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 13, the first common data that turns on the commons C0 and C4, and the second common data that turns on the commons C1 and C5. data, third common data that turns on common C2 and common C6, and fourth common data that turns on common C3 and common C7. The four common data are cyclically selected in that order as the LED output counter increments.

As a result, the lighting target of the game information display means 90 sequentially changes in the order of the LED group 90a→90b→90c→90d→90a→ . The lighting target of the performance information display means 137) changes sequentially in the order of the 7-segment display portion 137a→137b→137c→137d→137a→ . As described above, in this embodiment, common data is simultaneously output to the commons C0 to C3 for the game information display means 90 and the commons C4 to C7 for the performance display means 135. FIG. However, with respect to the performance display means 135, this LED management process only outputs common data, and the output of LED data to the LED data port 1 connected to the performance display means 135 is performed later in the out-of-use area process (S105). ).

Subsequently, LED data for the game information display means 90 corresponding to the selected LED common is created (S135). That is, LED data for one of the LED groups 90a to 90d of the game information display means 90 is created corresponding to one of the commons C0 to C3 (FIG. 25). Then, the LED data is output to the selected LED data port (here, the LED data port 0 connected to the game information display means 90) (S136), and the LED management process ends. As a result, the four LED groups 90a to 90d of the game information display means 90 can be turned on while being sequentially switched every 4 ms.

Following the above LED management processing (S102), external terminal management processing (S103) and solenoid management processing (S104) are performed. In the external terminal management process (S103), the operating state information of the pachinko machine is output to an external device such as a hall computer through an external output terminal provided on the back side of the front frame 3. Also, in the solenoid management process (S104), based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric auditors management process (S98) and the special electric auditors management process (S100), the normal electric auditors solenoid and the big winning opening solenoid Controls output of the excitation signal.

Subsequently, out-of-use area processing (S105) is performed. In the out-of-use area processing (S105), as shown in FIG. 26, first, all registers are saved to the stack (S141), the stack pointer for normal processing is saved (S142), and the stack pointer outside the use area is saved. A pointer address is set (S143).

Then, the display contents of the performance display means 135 are updated by the display contents update process (S144), and the LED data corresponding to the four 7-segment display portions 137a to 137d constituting the performance display means 135 are created. In the performance display means 135, first, after an operation confirmation display that repeats all lighting and all extinguishing is performed for a predetermined operation confirmation time (for example, about 5 seconds), the performance display monitor processing (S47 in FIG. 16) is performed. A plurality of types of base values (here, four types of real-time base values and first to third cumulative base values) are cyclically displayed every predetermined time (for example, 4.8 seconds).

The four 7-segment display units 137a to 137d (FIGS. 11 and 13) constituting the performance display means 135, for example, the upper two digits of the 7-segment display units 137d and 137c indicate the type of base value (real-time base value, first to 3rd accumulated base value), etc., and the seven-segment display portions 137b and 137a of the lower two digits serve as numerical display portions for displaying the numerical value of the base value.

The base value is measured for each unit measurement period until the out count reaches a predetermined number (here, 60000). Instead of starting from , it starts after a predetermined pre-measurement period elapses (for example, when the out number reaches a predetermined number (here, 300)).

During the real-time base value display period, for example, the real-time base value is displayed on the identification display section as "bL." However, depending on whether or not the number of outs in the unit measurement period at that time has reached a predetermined threshold (for example, 6000), the display mode of "bL." It's like For example, the base value is rounded off to the first decimal place and displayed in the numeric display. If the value after rounding is three digits or more, "99." will be displayed in the numeric display to indicate overflow. do.

Further, during the display period of the first to third cumulative base values, the identification display section displays, for example, "b1." to "b3." The first to third cumulative base values at the time are displayed, but if the first to third cumulative base values have not yet been obtained, for example, "b1." to "b3." At the same time, "--" is displayed on the numerical display. For example, since none of the first to third cumulative base values are obtained until the first unit measurement period ends after the power is first turned on, the performance display means during the first to third cumulative base value display periods The display of 135 is "b1.--" to "b3.--".

During the pre-measurement period (the number of output items is less than 300) before the first unit measurement period starts, "bL.", "b1." to "b3." Then, for example, "--" is illuminated on the numerical display.

Following the display content update process (S144), the out-of-use area LED update process (S145) is performed. In this out-of-use area LED update process (S145), as shown in FIG. 27, first, the value of the LED output counter is obtained (S151). This LED output counter is used for common data selection in the LED management process of FIG. Then, based on the value of the LED output counter, from the LED data corresponding to the 7-segment display portions 137a to 137d created in the display content update process (S144), to the common selected in the LED management process (FIG. 24) The corresponding LED data is selected (S152).

For example, when the common C4 is turned on in the LED management process, the LED data corresponding to the 7-segment display section 137a is selected, and when the common C7 is turned on in the LED management process, the 7-segment display section 137d is selected. In this way, since a common LED output counter is used for selecting the commons C4 to C7 in the LED management process and for selecting the LED data in the out-of-use area LED update process, the LED data corresponding to the selected common can be easily and reliably selected, and the program capacity can be reduced.

Then, the LED data selected in S152 is output to the LED data port 1 connected to the performance display means 135 (S153), and the out-of-use area LED updating process is terminated.

Following the above out-of-use area LED update process (S145), out-of-area SW detection information storage process (S146) and test firing test signal update process (S147) are executed, and then the stack pointer during normal processing is restored ( S148), all registers are restored from the stack (S149), and the out-of-use area processing ends.

Returning to the timer interrupt processing in FIG. 19, the description continues. When the out-of-use area processing (S105) described above ends, the WDT is cleared (S106), and the timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, the control operation of the sub-control board 123a will be described. The sub-control board 123a includes the liquid crystal display means 106, the illumination means 136, the speakers 18 and 25, the first frame movable body 26, the second frame movable body 27, the blower means 28, the first board movable body 107, the second movable board. It controls the performance by various performance means such as the body 108 and the board third movable body 109, and as shown in FIG. It has control means 143, normal notice effect control means 144, customer waiting control means 145, volume setting means 146, light amount setting means 147, and the like.

Note that the types of effects produced by the various production means include image effects in which an image including a moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106 or the like, light emission effects by the illumination means 136 or the like, sound effects by generating sound, rotating body 44, effects, etc. There is a movable presentation by a movable body such as the button 41 or the like.

Sound effects include normal sound effects in which sounds are output from speakers 18 and 25 based on sound data, and specific sound effects in which operation sounds are generated by driving movable bodies (predetermined parts) by driving means. Here, the volume of the normal sound effect changes as the volume level is changed by the volume adjustment operation described later, but the volume of the specific sound effect does not change even if the volume level is changed by the volume adjustment operation. However, regarding the volume of the specific sound effect, if the player can touch the movable body that is driven, the volume of the action sound may change depending on whether the player is touching the movable body. have a nature.

In this way, the sub-control board 123a includes a display effect executing means capable of executing a display effect of displaying an image including a moving image on the liquid crystal display means (display means) 106, and outputs sounds from the speakers (audio output means) 18 and 25. and a sound effect executing means capable of executing the sound effect to be output. Note that the moving image displayed in the display effect is configured by, for example, connecting a plurality of scenes.

The special reserved quantity display control means 141 controls the display of the first and second special reserved quantities on the liquid crystal display means 106. Corresponds to the first reserved images X1 to X4 for the number (maximum 4), the second reserved images Y1 to Y4 for the second special reserved number (maximum 4), and the first and second special symbols during fluctuation It is configured to display on the liquid crystal display means 106 a pending image Z during fluctuation.

In this embodiment, since the reserved memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved memory of the first special symbol, the second special symbol side is also given priority with respect to the reserved display, and as shown in FIG. The second reserved images Y1 to Y4 are partially overlapped and displayed in front of the reserved images X1 to X4. When a pending addition command relating to the first and second special pending numbers is received from the main control board 122a, one additional display of the first and second pending images X1-, Y1- is displayed at the end of the queue. Also, when receiving a pending subtraction command related to the first and second special pending numbers from the main control board 122a, the first and second pending images X1 ~, Y1 ~ toward the front side of the queue one by one Along with shifting, the first and second retained images X1 and Y1 pushed out are moved to a predetermined position, for example, and changed to a suspended image Z during variation. In the present embodiment, the display color (display mode) of the first and second pending images X1 ~, Y1 ~, and the changing pending image Z is set to, for example, "white" by default, and when executing the pending change effect described later is changed according to the scenario selected by the look-ahead announcement effect control means 142.

The pre-reading notice effect control means 142 controls the pre-reading notice effect. The look-ahead notice performance is based on the result of look-ahead judgment by the main control board 122a, and whether or not the stop symbols after the variation of the first and second special symbols become the first and second big win modes and a big win game occurs. Based on the result of the pre-reading determination, the pattern variation (target variation) corresponding to the special random number information that is the target of the pre-reading determination (in the pre-reading zone). There are a "continuous effect" for executing effects, and a "suspended change effect" for differentiating (changing) the display modes of the first and second pending images X1-, Y1- based on the result of pre-reading determination.

The pattern variation effect control means 143 controls various effects related to the variable display of the effect pattern 120, that is, image effects, light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc. When receiving a variation pattern command from the main control board 122a (2) image production, light emission production, sound production, and movable production relating to the variable display of the production pattern 120 based on the fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the specified fluctuation pattern and the advance notice production scenario selected by the normal advance notice production control means 144. etc., and when a variation stop command is received, the stop pattern selected based on the stop pattern command and the variation pattern command stops the variation of the performance pattern 120, and the accompanying image performance, light emission performance, Sound production, movable production, etc. are stopped.

The normal notice effect control means 144 executes a normal notice effect. The normal notice effect is based on the big hit determination result or the like by the big hit determination processing on the main control board 122a side, and foretells whether or not the stop pattern after the pattern change will be the big win mode during the pattern change. There are "pseudo-continuous", "SU effect", "timer effect", "resurrection effect", "premier effect", "button effect", and the like.

Here, the "pseudo-run" is an effect in which the effect pattern 120 is changed a plurality of times on the liquid crystal display means 106 while the first and second special symbols fluctuate once. It is designed to be highly reliable. In addition, the "SU effect" is a predetermined effect step including the display of the effect pattern 120 on the liquid crystal display means 106 during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols, for example, in multiple stages according to the reliability of the big hit (for example, SU1 to SU3), and is set so that, for example, the higher the stage of the production step, the higher the reliability of the big hit. The "timer effect" is, for example, a effect in which a timer image is displayed at a predetermined timing on the liquid crystal display means 106 to measure time (for example, countdown). It is The ``resurrection performance'' is a performance that revives from a state in which a loss or the like is displayed and becomes, for example, a big hit mode, and the ``premium performance'' is a performance that has an extremely low appearance rate and, when it appears, for example, a probability variable big win is determined. In addition, "button effect" is, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the effect button 41 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (operation established) during the operation valid period during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols, for example, the reliability of the big hit , a predetermined post-operation effect is executed.

When the normal notice effect control means 144 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 122a, the information obtained from the variation pattern command (here, the big hit determination result and the variation pattern selection result) and the setting value (settings 1 to 6 Either) and the normal notice effect selection table, whether or not to execute a lottery related to the normal notice effect (with lottery/no lottery) and the like are selected. In addition, when the lottery execution is selected for at least one of the plurality of normal notice effects, the normal notice effects include, for example, a big hit determination result, a set value (any of settings 1 to 6), and each normal notice effect. select one of a plurality of scenarios based on a scenario selection table for

The customer waiting control means 145 changes the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 after the customer waiting start condition including the reception of the customer waiting command (BA04H) is satisfied. It controls the production etc. during the customer waiting state (during the fluctuation stop state in which the pattern is not changed) until the customer waiting end condition is satisfied such as the start of.

After the start of the customer waiting state, first, a pre-customer waiting production is performed. In this performance before the customer waits, the image of the performance pattern 120 which has been stopped due to the last pattern variation is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106, and the illumination means 136 emits light in a predetermined customer waiting light emission mode, and the speaker 18, 25 continues to output a predetermined BGM.

When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the start of the pre-customer waiting production, the production shifts to the customer waiting production. A menu display operation notification image that notifies the operation method for displaying the menu screen while continuing to display the image, a volume adjustment operation notification image that notifies the operation method for volume adjustment, and an operation method for light amount adjustment. The display of the light amount adjustment operation notification image, etc., to be performed is started. Thus, during the execution of the pre-customer-waiting effect, that is, during the period from the start of the customer-waiting state until, for example, 30 seconds have elapsed, the menu display operable period and the sound volume/light intensity adjustment operable period are set. , the menu display operation notification image, the sound volume adjustment operation notification image, and the light amount adjustment operation notification image for notifying it are not displayed.

After that, when the demonstration start condition is established (for example, 180 seconds have passed since the start of the customer waiting state), the customer waiting effect is shifted to the demonstration effect. In the demonstration production, "model image demo" to run the image movie of the model in question, "model logo" to display the model logo image showing the logo of the model in question, "company logo" to display the corporate logo image showing the logo of the relevant manufacturer ”, “immersion prevention display” for displaying an immersion prevention display image, etc. are sequentially performed.

After the start of the demonstration effect, the customer waits for a predetermined time, for example, until the customer waiting end condition such as the start of the variation of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 is satisfied. To repeatedly execute a demonstration performance continuously while interposing a performance or without intervening a customer waiting performance.

Volume setting means (volume level setting means, volume level changing means, first volume level changing means, set volume changing means) 146 adjusts the volume of sounds (BGM, sound effects, notification sounds, etc.) output from the speakers 18 and 25. The level is set or changed in a plurality of stages, and the hall set value (value A) obtained by the volume adjustment knob (A operation means, second operation means) 140 arranged on the rear side of the game machine main body 1 , the player set value (Otsu value) obtained by the volume operation means (Otsu operation means, first operation means) 39 arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main body 1, and the volume level setting table stored in advance. Based on this, the volume level is set in a plurality of stages, for example, in eight stages from 0 (no sound) to 7 (maximum volume). It should be noted that the volume adjustment by the volume operation means 39 can be performed during a predetermined volume adjustment enabled period. The volume adjustable period can be arbitrarily set, but for example, all periods except for a certain period when the power is turned on may be set as the volume adjustable period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the volume level setting table contains 10 levels of hall setting values from T0 to T9 by the volume control knob 140 and five levels of player setting values from M1 to M5 by the volume control means 39. Corresponding volume level assignments and initial positions of player settings M1-M5 for each hall setting T0-T9 are set. Of the hall set values T0 to T9, the ones usually selected by hall staff are T3 to T7 for the normal mode and T8 and T9 for the power saving mode. When T8 or T9 for the power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is turned ON, and when the power saving start condition is met, for example, a predetermined time has passed since the start of the customer waiting state, the light amount is set to be lower than that in the normal mode. It is controlled to emit light (or turn off) in the light emission mode during power saving. When T3 to T7 for the normal mode are selected, the power saving mode is turned off.

In the sound volume level setting table shown in FIG. 28, the corresponding relationship between the player setting values M1 to M5 and the sound volume levels are all common to the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, but the initial positions are different. . That is, for any of the hall set values T3 to T7, volume levels 3 to 7 are assigned to the player set values M1 to M5, respectively, but the initial positions for the hall set values T3 to T7 are set by the player. It is set to values M1 to M5 (that is, volume levels 3 to 7). Thus, with regard to the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the larger the hall set value, the higher the initial sound volume level.

With regard to the hole set values T8 and T9 for the power saving mode as well, the correspondence relationships between the player set values M1 to M5 and the volume levels are all common, but the initial positions are different. That is, for any of the hall set values T3 to T7, volume levels 3 to 7 are assigned to the player set values M1 to M5, respectively, as in the case of the hall set values T3 to T7. The initial positions for T8 and T9 are set to player settings M1 and M5 (ie volume levels 3 and 7), respectively. Thus, the larger the hall set values T8 and T9 for the power saving mode, the higher the initial sound volume level.

Of the hall set values T0 to T2 that are not normally selected in game halls, the hall set value T0 is for making a silent state, and the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5 are all 0 (silent). It's becoming Hall setting value T1 is for presentation, for example, the volume level corresponding to the lowest stage player setting value M1 is 1, and the volume levels corresponding to other player setting values M2 to M5 are the same as hall setting value T3, etc. , and the initial position is set to the player set value M1 (that is, volume level 1). The hall set value T2 is for factory shipment, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum stage player set value M1 is 2, and the sound volume corresponding to the other player set values M2 to M5 is the hall set value T3 and the like. They are the same, and the initial position is set to the player set value M1 (that is, volume level 2). In this way, the initial positions for the hole set values T0 to T2 are all set to the minimum player set value M1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, regardless of the player's set value by the volume operation means 39, the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall set value at that time (here, the player's set value volume level corresponding to M5).

Here, the error sound is a notification sound that is output when a predetermined error occurs. In this embodiment, not only normal error sounds but also specific notification sounds such as various security notification sounds output when the power is turned on (RAM clear notification sound, backup recovery notification sound, setting change notification sound, setting confirmation notification sound, etc.) ) is also output at the volume level for the error sound. The same applies to embodiments to be described later, unless otherwise specified.

The volume setting means 146 also includes a volume adjustment notification means 146a, a reset means 146b, and the like. The volume adjustment notification means 146a is for displaying the volume adjustment notification image PV on the liquid crystal display means 106, for example, and during the volume adjustment notification period started when the player operates the volume operation means 39, the liquid crystal A volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed on the display means 106 .

The volume adjustment notification image PV is for notifying the volume setting status by the player's operation. For example, as shown in FIG. Volume display graphics 151-155 are provided. The volume display figures 151 to 155 are formed, for example, in a vertical belt shape having a length corresponding to a value set by the player, and are aligned in the left-right direction with the lower ends aligned. Each of the volume display figures 151 to 155 can be displayed in two different display modes, for example, "outline" and "solid". By setting the display mode of the number to "solid" and the others to "white", the player's set value relating to the sound volume is notified. For example, in the case of the player setting value M3, as shown in FIG. 29, the three volume display figures 151 to 153 from the left are "solid", and the other volume display figures 154 and 155 are "outline". , respectively.

In this way, the volume adjustment notification image PV indicates the range of player setting values (first information) that can be selected by operating the volume operation means 39 by the number of displayed volume display figures, and also indicates the volume display by "solid coloring". The number of figures displayed indicates the player's setting value (second information) at that time. In the following description, the volume adjustment notification images PV corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5 are distinguished as PV1 to PV5, respectively.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the initial position differs for each hall setting value. Therefore, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the The adjustment notification image PV changes together. For example, as shown in FIGS. 31A to 31E, when the hole setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M1 (initial position), the hole setting value is displayed while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. is changed in order of T3->T4->T5->T6->T7, the volume level changes in order of 3->4->5->6->7 according to the initial position corresponding to the hall setting value after change, and the volume adjustment The notification image PV also changes sequentially in the order of PV1→PV2→PV3→PV4→PV5 in accordance with the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

The resetting means (second volume level changing means) 146b is for resetting the volume level, and when a predetermined reset condition is satisfied, the player setting value (that is, the volume level) corresponds to the hall setting value. It is designed to reset to the initial position (specific volume level). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, first and second reset conditions are provided as reset conditions for resetting the volume level, and the first reset condition is "when the volume control knob 140 is switched". , the second reset condition (predetermined condition) is ``when the demonstration start condition is established during the customer waiting state (for example, 180 seconds have passed since the start of the customer waiting state), and the player setting value is smaller than the initial position''. ing.

For example, (a)→(b), (b)→(c), (c)→(d), and (d)→(e) in FIG. 31 all show the situation when the first reset condition is met. After switching the volume control knob 140, the player setting value (that is, the volume level) is set to the initial position corresponding to the new hall setting value. Further, for example, when the hall set value is set to T5, 180 seconds have passed since the start of the customer waiting state, and the player set value at that time is M1, which is smaller than the initial position M3 (specific sound volume level 5). If (sound volume level 3) or M2 (sound volume level 4) (predetermined condition satisfied), the player setting value is reset to M3 (specific volume level 5).

In this manner, the reset means 146b adjusts the volume level so that the volume of the normal sound effect and the volume of the specific sound effect are in a predetermined balance, regardless of the player's volume adjustment operation, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It constitutes a changeable second volume level changing means.

The light amount setting means 147 sets the light amount when the illumination means 136 made up of various light emitting substrates on the frame side and the board side is caused to emit light, and corresponds to the player's setting value obtained by the light amount operation means 40. Then, the light amount level is set to any one of a plurality of stages (for example, three stages 1 to 3). As described above, in this embodiment, the light amount level can be adjusted only by operating the light amount operation means 40 without providing an operation means for hall personnel such as the volume control knob 140 . Also, the light amount level for the light emission for error notification is, for example, always the maximum light amount level, and cannot be changed by the light amount operation means 40 . It should be noted that the light amount adjustment by the light amount manipulating means 40 can be performed during a predetermined light amount adjustable period. The light amount adjustable period can be set arbitrarily, but for example, all periods except for a certain period when the power is turned on may be set as the light amount adjustable period.

The light amount setting means 147 also includes a light amount adjustment notification means 147a. The light amount adjustment notification means 147a is for displaying the light amount adjustment notification image PL on the liquid crystal display means 106, for example. 106 displays a light amount adjustment notification image PL.

For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the light amount adjustment notification image PL includes a plurality of (here, three) light amount display figures 161 to 163 corresponding to the number of stages of the light amount level. The light intensity display figures 161 to 163 are formed, for example, in a vertical strip shape having a length corresponding to the light intensity level, and are aligned in the left-right direction with the lower ends aligned. Each of the light amount display figures 161 to 163 can be displayed in two types of display mode, for example, "blank" and "solid". The light amount level is notified by setting the display mode to "solid" and the others to "blank". For example, when the light amount level is set to 1, as shown in FIG. 30, only the first light amount display figure 161 is "solid", and the other light amount display figures 162 and 163 are "outline". ” is displayed.

Next, a specific example of the symbol variation effect in this pachinko machine will be described. First, specific examples of the pending change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, but before that, the purpose of this pending change effect will be described.

In recent years, with the spread of smartphones, the use of applications such as SNS, games, comics, and video sites has spread rapidly, and many players can be seen holding smartphones while playing pachinko/pachislot games. is becoming Such players are preoccupied with operating their smartphones, watching videos played, and enjoying SNS, so their eyes are not on the pachinko/pachislot board but on their own smartphones. often

One of the reasons why such phenomenon occurs is considered to be the game characteristics of pachinko/pachislot machines. That is, pachinko and pachislot are designed to repeat winning games while maintaining a predetermined probability and a predetermined output rate (output rate per predetermined time). number of times (time)), and the player inevitably spends a lot of time on the losing game. Therefore, most of the time spent in the game for the player is time spent in a boring losing game, so to speak.

That is why, until now, pachinko and pachislot manufacturers have considered from various angles the effects and notices that keep players from getting bored, and have created interesting effects and notices so that players can endure repeated losing games. rice field. However, as mentioned above, recent players are using smartphones to overcome boredom during losing games, and they are interested in the effects and notices that manufacturers have made efforts to think. There is a situation that there is no such thing. In this embodiment, as described above, in order to deliver more effective effects and notices to players who are interested in using smartphones during games, for example, effects and notices are constructed in consideration of the following points. I have to.

First of all, when considering a gimmick to change the situation where the player's interest is (smartphone) > (effect or notice) to (smartphone) < (effect or notice), spend on losing games. It means that we do not dare to create a relationship of (smartphone) < (directing and notice) at all times. If you try to build a relationship of (smartphone) < (production and notice) in all the time spent on a losing game, the appearance and complexity of the production and notice will increase, and on the contrary, the important part will be the player. It leads to the fact that it does not reach (I understand that it is flashy, but the reliability and expectations are not well conveyed). In addition, it is simply assumed that players who are interested in using smartphones are enjoying content that they are particularly interested in from among the many content available. It is nearly impossible to execute in time, and in that respect, there is honestly no chance of winning even if you challenge the smartphone head-on.

In consideration of these, in the present embodiment, it is selected not to dare to create a relationship of (smartphone) < (effect and notice) in all the time spent on the losing game.

In this case, the next important thing is how to create a gimmick that changes the situation where the player's interest is (smartphone) > (effect or notice) to (smartphone) < (effect or notice). or set to For example, for effects and notices aimed at changing (smartphone) < (effects and notices), if you set the frequency of appearance in a single losing game to be high, even if such effects and notices appear As a result, the frequency of deriving a failing result increases. In this way, it is effective for first-time players, but the effect gradually fades for known players, and it is possible that (smartphones) > (effects and notices) will eventually fall. become more sexual. Of course, this does not mean that it is not good as an effect or notice of the gaming machine, but setting the appearance frequency in one losing game to be high, or setting it so that it appears multiple times during one losing game. By doing so, as described above, it is also possible to employ a configuration that provides effects and notices that are more effective only for first-time players.

However, in order to make it more effective not only for first-time players, but also for known players, the production aimed at changing the interest (smartphone) < (production and notice) It is desirable to set the frequency of appearance in one losing game of advance notice to be low. In other words, by setting the appearance frequency of such effects and notices low, the aim is to change the player's interest from (smartphone) > (effects and notices) to (smartphone) < (effects and notices). It is possible to set the reliability of the effects and notices that have been made high (reliability at the time of appearance is relatively high due to the decrease in the appearance rate in the losing game), so the frequency of deriving the winning result when it appears Can be set higher. This makes it possible to change the target of interest of the player from (smartphone)>(effect or notice) to (smartphone)<(effect or notice), regardless of whether it is the first time or is known.

The most important point is that the effects and notices for changing the target of the player's interest to (smartphone) < (effects and notices) are shown in Fig. 33 as follows. It is possible to achieve a more effective performance or notice.

The pending change effect shown in FIG. 33 is executed during the reach fluctuation or before the reach change in the normal game state. Change the display color of image Z from the default white (usually reserved) to red (red reserved) It is more likely to change to a color indicating relatively high reliability (here, red or higher) than low reliability (here, blue and green). Regarding this pending change effect, the image effect will be described first. At the start of this pending change effect, the screen of the liquid crystal display means 106 is toned down (visibility is suppressed), and an image showing an "arrow" appears ( FIG. 33(a)), a pre-suspension change effect for effecting a change on hold is started. At this time, on the screen of the liquid crystal display means 106, in addition to the image of the "arrow" related to the pre-suspension change effect, a pending image including the pending image Z during fluctuation, and the effect pattern 120 reduced and saved to the corner of the screen. Although it is displayed, for example, the image of the "arrow" and the reserved image are excluded from the target of toning down, and the other parts including the production pattern 120 are set as the target of toning down, so that the image of the "arrow" and the reserved image and are visually conspicuous. At this time, the pending image including the pending image Z during fluctuation is displayed in default white (normal pending).

Here, the tone-down of the image is performed by setting the priority of each layer (non-target layer) that displays the "arrow" image and the reserved image, which are not to be toned down, to the image of the effect pattern 120 etc. is set higher than the priority of each layer (target layer) that displays , and a specific layer that displays tone-down data such as black semi-transparency is arranged between the non-target layer and the target layer. It should be noted that, for example, when an "arrow" appears, in addition to tone down, highlighting such as effect processing may be performed. After the “arrow” appears, the “arrow” flies, approaches and collides (hits) with the changing pending image Z (FIG. 33(b)→(c)), and the collided changing pending image The display color of Z changes from white to red (FIG. 33(d)). Note that the effect before change of hold in FIG. 33 is a success pattern when change of hold is performed, but a failure pattern when change of hold is not performed may be provided. This failure pattern can be configured, for example, so that the "arrow" does not hit the suspended image Z during change.

Next, the sound effect of the hold change effect shown in FIG. 33 will be described. First, with regard to the normal sound effect consisting of voice output from the speakers 18 and 25, one type of BGM1 is continuously output throughout the entire hold change effect, and as a volume increase effect that temporarily increases the volume, "Arrow Appears, "appearing sound" (1st voice), when "arrow" approaches, "flickering sound (3rd voice)", when "arrow" collides and changes color, "collision change sound" (2nd voice ) are output respectively. In addition, regarding the specific sound effect in which the drive means drives a predetermined part to generate an operation sound, the vibrating sound produced by vibrating the effect button 41 by the vibrating device 72 is generated in parallel with the "collision change sound" in the normal sound effect, for example. occur.

Also, FIG. 33 shows the change history of the volume (dB) of the execution sound due to the sound effects (normal sound effect and specific sound effect). 28) are displayed numerically and graphically. As is clear from the figure, in this hold change effect, regardless of the volume level, the final section (2s to 3s) included in the latter half section of the hold change effect (0 to 3s) is a jackpot mode (specific mode). The volume (second volume) of the "collision change sound" etc. generated when suggesting the possibility of becoming is the "appearance sound" generated at the start (0s) included in the first half section of the hold change effect (specific notice) and so on (first volume). In addition, after the start of the hold change effect, the volume (third volume) such as the “flicker sound” that occurs in the middle section (1s) before the final section is the “appearance sound” that occurs at the start of the hold change effect. It is smaller than the volume (first volume).

Thus, in the pending change effect (specific effect) shown in FIG. 33, the first half section that does not yet suggest the possibility of becoming a big hit mode (specific mode) and the second half section that suggests the possibility of becoming a big win mode (specific mode) In the first half section, the sound (first sound) related to the hold change effect (specific effect) is output at the first volume, and in the second half section the sound (second sound) related to the hold change effect (specific effect) is output. Output is performed at a second volume larger than the first volume, and furthermore, after the first half of the section in which the sound is output at the first volume is executed, before the second half of the section in which the sound is output at the second volume is executed, the A sound (third sound) relating to the pending change effect (specific effect) is output at a third volume smaller than the first volume.

As described above, by generating the "appearance sound" or the like to be executed when the notice appears at the first sound volume, it is possible to first make the player aware that the notice has appeared. That is, it is possible to invite the player's line of sight from the smartphone to the liquid crystal screen on the game machine board. In the example of FIG. 33, in addition to this, since the screen is toned down on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible to further give a different impression to the player who shifts his eyes to the liquid crystal screen. , the player's line of sight can be more fixed on the liquid crystal screen. Of course, the screen is not limited to a toned-down screen, and a white-out screen may be used. At that time, an image of an "arrow" may be already displayed to provide a mechanism to keep the player's eyes glued. can be

Next, it is desirable that the volume (third volume) of the "sounding sound" to be generated subsequent to the "appearing sound" is lower than the volume of the "appearing sound" (first volume). The point of this is that the role of the sound output here is just a "flashing sound". That is, a player who has shifted his eyes from the smartphone to the liquid crystal screen may stop operating the smartphone and look at the liquid crystal screen in anticipation that an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation will be executed. It is conceivable, but the "inciting sound" executed at this timing is a sound effect for inciting whether the subsequent change in the pending image (effect suggesting the degree of expectation) will be executed or not. Execution at a volume higher than the 1st volume or the 2nd volume gives the player an excessive sense of expectation, and when the highly anticipated performance is not executed after that, the player is given a great disappointment. Considering the risk of falling. In particular, since this is the moment when the player's interest is shifted from the smartphone to the LCD screen, if the production and notice are constructed without considering such risks, the pending image will change (expectation) as a result. Even if a similar effect or notice is executed after that, the known player will not be able to understand the timing (the appearance of the effect or notice). At the timing of the smartphone, there is a high possibility that you will not be able to move your line of sight from the smartphone to the LCD screen. After taking these into consideration, the volume of the "fighting sound" (third volume) is the volume of the "appearing sound" (first volume), and the volume of the subsequent "collision change sound" (second volume) ).

Next, when a "collision-changing sound" or the like is generated following the "flashing sound" or the like, that is, when a change in the pending image (a production that suggests the degree of expectation) is executed, the "collision-changing sound" or the like is generated. It is desirable to set the volume (second volume) higher than the volume (first volume) of "appearing sound" and the like (third volume) of "sounding sound". One of the purposes of such a setting is to increase interest in the change of the hold image (effect that suggests the degree of expectation) to the player who has already shifted his eyes from the smartphone to the liquid crystal screen. It is to maximize the atmosphere. The second purpose is to once again appeal to players who unfortunately could not catch their eyes at the time when the announcement was made. Some players are not interested in the appearance of the notice and are only interested in the result of the notice. By generating a "collision change sound" etc. with , it is possible to effectively direct the eye to the liquid crystal screen.

In this way, the pending change notice shown in FIG. 33 attracts the player's attention more than in the case of simply executing the pending change effect (effect of only changing the color of the pending by the effect image). For example, even a player who concentrates on operating a smartphone and does not pay attention to the liquid crystal presentation can be made to pay attention to the liquid crystal presentation. And by combining this kind of performance that deprives the smartphone of the line of sight with the normal performance that is not so, in a more optimal way, it is possible to execute the performance that deprives the smartphone of the line of sight more effectively. Become. In other words, not only one of the productions, but also the coexistence of each of them, and by being creative and ingenious in executing them with more optimal timing and expression, we can realize unprecedented production expressions, and at the same time It is possible to deprive a certain smartphone of a player's line of sight and attention.

Further, in the example of FIG. 33, since the production button 41 is vibrated at the timing of outputting the "collision change sound" or the like to generate a vibrating sound, for example, the volume level is set low by operating the volume operation means 39. Even players who are concentrating on their smartphones can be appealed to by the vibrating sound generated at a substantially constant volume regardless of the volume level, effectively drawing their attention.

In the numerical value and graph of the sound volume change history shown in FIG. and the volume of the execution sound by the specific sound production are separately displayed. Of the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect, only the normal sound effect changes the volume of the execution sound when the volume level (set volume) changes, and the specific sound effect does not change the volume level (set volume). However, it does not change the volume of the execution sound. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, the change history of the volume due to the normal sound effect has substantially the same shape at each volume level, and the volume level is changed from 3 (first set volume) to 7 (second set volume). The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in volume, is always about 1.2. On the other hand, the volume of the vibration sound in the specific sound effect is 80 dB regardless of the volume level. The value of 80 dB, which is the volume of the specific sound effect, is greater than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3 in the same period, and the volume of the normal sound effect at the maximum volume level 7. is smaller than

On the other hand, looking at the volume change history (Fig. 33) that combines the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect, the volume level is The rate of increase in volume when is changed from 3 to 7 is about 1.2 (first volume ratio), but the period in which both the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect occur (specific period) The middle rate of increase is smaller than 1.2 (second volume ratio). Note that the synthetic volume LP (dB) obtained by synthesizing the first volume LP1 (dB) and the second volume LP2 (dB) is obtained by the formula shown in FIG.

Thus, in the hold change effects shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the minimum volume level (first set volume) that can be changed by the player operation is set to 3 and the maximum volume level (second set volume) 7, a non-specific period in which the volume ratio of the execution sound when the sound effect is executed is the first volume ratio, and a specific period in which the second volume ratio is smaller than the first volume ratio. is provided. Also, during the non-specified period, the normal sound effect is executed, but the specific sound effect is not executed, and during the specific period, the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect are executed. Further, the volume of the specific sound effect is set lower than the volume of the normal sound effect during the specific period when the maximum sound volume level (second set volume) 7 is set.

When the hall set value by the volume control knob 140 is set to T4, the initial position of the volume level is set to volume level 4 corresponding to the player set value M2, as shown in FIG. In this case, in the example of 2s to 3s in FIG. 34, when the volume level is set to 3 (first level), the volume of the normal sound effect is higher than the volume of the specific sound effect, so the specific sound effect While the volume of the normal sound effect is more difficult to hear (listen to) than the volume of the specific sound effect, when the volume level is set to 7 (third level), the volume of the normal sound effect is higher than the volume of the specific sound effect. Since the volume becomes smaller, the volume of the normal sound effect is easier to listen to (listen to) than the specific sound effect. Furthermore, when the volume level is set to 4 (second level), the volume is higher than when it is set to volume level 3 (first level) and when it is set to volume level 7 (third level). , the difference between the volume due to the specific sound effect and the volume due to the normal sound effect is small. In this case, the reset means (second volume level changing means) 146b changes (resets) the volume level to volume level 4 (second level) when a predetermined reset condition is satisfied (FIG. 32). It's becoming Approximately the same can be said for the cases where the hall setting value is set to T4, T5, and T6, but in these cases, the second level (volume level 5, in the case of T6, when the volume level is set to 6), the difference between the volume of the specific sound effect and the volume of the normal sound effect is smaller than when the volume level is set to 7 (third level). but louder than when set to volume level 3 (first level).

In addition, a first hold change effect shown in FIG. 33 and a second hold change effect obtained by excluding a specific sound effect from the first hold change effect are provided, and the first hold change effect is more effective than the case where the second hold change effect appears. It may be controlled so that the possibility of the big hit mode is higher when the performance appears. In addition, in the pending change effect shown in FIG. 33, the display mode of the variable pending image Z corresponding to the change was changed, but the display mode of the first pending images X1 to X4, the second pending images Y1 to Y4, etc. You may change at arbitrary timings. Also, the display mode other than the display color, such as the shape and size, may be changed with respect to the reserved image.

Subsequently, regarding the effect during normal fluctuation (symbol fluctuation by normal fluctuation pattern), specific examples are divided into the probability change state (special game state) shown in FIG. 36 and the normal game state shown in FIGS. explain.

The normal fluctuation during the probability variable state (high probability) has a short fluctuation time of about several seconds, and in the example of FIG. Start → high speed fluctuation → stop) is repeated. Also, in the example of FIG. 36, high-precision BGM is continuously output as a normal sound production, and a "starting sound" is produced as a symbol variation sound in accordance with the start of symbol variation and high-speed variation. A "stop sound" is output in accordance with the stop.

Also, in the example of FIG. 36, various advance notices are executed in specific symbol variations. That is, at each timing of the elapsed time 8s, 10s, and 12s corresponding to three consecutive pattern fluctuations, the vibrating device 72 vibrates the production button 41 in accordance with the pattern stop and the output of the "stop sound". A sound is generated (specific sound production). Also, at the timing of the elapsed time 14s corresponding to the next pattern change, as shown in FIG. sound is output. Furthermore, at the timing of the elapsed time 16s corresponding to the next pattern variation, as shown in FIG. The upward movement of the movable body 109 is performed (specific sound production). At the timing of the elapsed time 18 to 19s corresponding to the next pattern variation, as shown in FIG. will be

Also, FIG. 36-1 shows the volume of the execution sound of the normal sound effect and the volume of the execution sound of the specific sound effect separately for the range from 6s to 14s in FIG. As shown in FIG. 36-1, the change history of the volume due to the normal sound production has approximately the same shape at each volume level, and the volume level is changed from 3 (first set volume) to 7 (second set volume). The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in the volume in the case of 1.2, is always about 1.2. On the other hand, the volume of the vibration sound in the specific sound effect is 80 dB regardless of the volume level. The volume is substantially the same as or smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect at 6.

On the other hand, looking at the volume change history (Fig. 36) that combines the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect, the volume level is changed from 3 to 7 during the period in which the specific sound effect does not occur (non-specified period). The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume, is about 1.2, but for example, at the timings of 8 s, 10 s, and 12 s of elapsed time, both the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect (vibration sound) are generated. (Specific period), the rate of increase is less than 1.2. In addition, both the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect occur at the timings of the elapsed time 16s, 18s, and 19s, but among them, the increase rate at the time of the elapsed time 16s is 1.2, which is the same as the non-specific period. there is This is because the moving sound of the third movable body 109 on the board is about 50 dB, which is very small compared to the sound from the speaker, and hardly affects the change in the overall sound volume.

In the normal variation during the normal game state (low probability) shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the pattern variation is performed once in the period of 1 s to 9 s of the elapsed time, and the variation starts at the elapsed time of 1 s, After performing high-speed fluctuation in 2s to 5s, the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern are stopped in order in 6s to 9s, and finally stopped. In addition, as a normal sound production, normal BGM is continuously output, and as a pattern fluctuation sound, a "start sound" is played at each stop of the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern in accordance with the start of the pattern fluctuation. At the same time, a "stop sound" is output. In addition, at time 3s during the high-speed fluctuation, the SU1 false effect of the SU effect appears, for example, a predetermined line is displayed on the screen and a predetermined "SU sound" is output from the speakers 18 and 25. - 特許庁

In addition, in the next pattern variation that is performed in the period of elapsed time 10s to 23s, SU1, SU2, and SU3 presentations of SU presentation are sequentially executed at 11s, 12s, and 13s during high-speed variation, and predetermined lines are displayed on the screen respectively. Along with the telop display, "SU sound" is output from the speakers 18 and 25, and in the subsequent 14s to 16s, SU3 confirmation effect, that is, an image indicating SU3 confirmation is displayed on the screen. In addition, during the SU3 finalization effect, after a "determined sound" is output as a volume increase effect, the character's words (character voice) are output as voice.

In addition, in the next symbol variation that is performed from the elapsed time 24 s, at the start of variation, the vibration sound (specific sound effect) of the effect button 41 is generated (normal sound effect) in accordance with the output of the "start sound" (normal sound effect). and special sound effects). This is an example of a jackpot suggestive effect (first special effect) capable of suggesting the possibility of a jackpot mode due to the pattern variation, and indicates that the possibility of a jackpot mode is higher than when no vibration sound is generated. showing.

Also, FIG. 38-1 shows the volume of the execution sound of the normal sound effect and the volume of the execution sound of the specific sound effect separately for the range from 22s to 26s in FIG. As shown in FIG. 38-1, the change history of the volume due to the normal sound production has approximately the same shape at each volume level, and the volume level is changed from 3 (first set volume) to 7 (second set volume). The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in the volume in the case of 1.2, is always about 1.2. On the other hand, the volume of the vibration sound in the specific sound effect is 80 dB regardless of the volume level, which is higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 6 and the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 7. is also small.

On the other hand, looking at the volume change history (FIGS. 37 and 38) that combines the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect, it can be seen that during the period when the specific sound effect does not occur (non-specified period), the volume level is changed from 3 to 7. The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume when the volume is changed to , is about 1.2. period), the rate of increase is less than 1.2.

Also, when comparing the normal fluctuation in the variable probability state (special game state) shown in FIG. 36 and the normal fluctuation in the normal game state (low probability) shown in FIGS. During the state (special game state), the average sound volume of the execution sound due to the normal sound effect is larger than during the normal game state (an example of a case where they are different). On the other hand, regarding the volume of the specific sound effect, there is no difference between the variable probability state (special game state) and the normal game state. That is, in the present embodiment, during the probability variable state (special game state) than during the normal game state, the volume due to the normal sound effect is larger than the volume due to the specific sound effect. ), it is easier (easier to hear) to hear the operation sounds such as the vibrating sound due to the specific sound effect in response to the sound from the speakers 18 and 25 due to the normal sound effect during the normal game state than during the normal game state.

In addition, when the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect are executed at the same time, the rate of increase in the volume when the volume level is changed from 3 to 7 (sound effect when set to the minimum volume level The volume ratio of the sound effect when set to the maximum volume level) is divided into normal fluctuation during the variable probability state (special game state) shown in FIG. 36 and normal fluctuation during the normal game state (low probability In comparison with the normal variation in), the probability variation state (special game state) is larger than the normal game state.

Also, in both the normal game state and the variable probability state (special game state), the volume of each execution sound when both the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect are executed is the minimum volume level (here When the volume level is set to 3), the volume of the normal sound effect is lower than the volume of the specific sound effect, and the volume of the normal sound effect is harder to hear than the specific sound effect. When the volume level is set to the maximum volume level (here, volume level 7), the volume of the normal sound effect is louder than the volume of the specific sound effect, and the volume of the normal sound effect is louder than the specific sound effect. It is easy.

Next, two specific examples of FIGS. 39 to 43 and FIGS. 44 to 48, which differ in the reliability of big hits, will be described for effects during reach fluctuation (pattern fluctuation after reach by reach fluctuation pattern). In the ready-to-win production A (low reliability of big win) shown in FIGS. 39 to 43, the production is performed with the theme of the battle between the monster and the main character Kappa. In the initial period of the reach fluctuation (elapsed time 0s to 41s), the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect are executed, and the specific sound effect (operation sound) is not executed.

In this early stage, the image production scenes are "reach title display" → "monster appearance" → "mini monster appearance" → "main character (kappa) appearance" → "mini monster attack" → "main character dodge & prepare" → " The main character attacks and repels mini-monsters”→“monsters reappear”→“monsters attack the main character” in order, and each of these scenes consists of one or more cuts (cut division).

Here, the cut division is the timing at which, in a series of moving images composed of a plurality of scene images, for example, the continuity of the images is cut off to switch the scene images (including not only still images but also moving images). , for example, when switching from a first scene to a second scene. By switching the scene, for example, the display content of the liquid crystal effect shifts from the image of the friendly character drawn in the first scene to the image of the monster drawn in the second scene. In this way, by switching the scene, the image of the character to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen can be displayed in the ready-to-win effect.

As a result, the content drawn in the first scene can be instantly switched to the second scene, so if you want to display a different character or switch to a different scene as described above, you can change the display content. This is an effective technique when you want to make a sudden change. Of course, cuts may change in the middle of a scene.

On the other hand, without using the cut split, by expressing the image on the LCD so that it transitions to either the top, bottom, left, or right (image like when the video camera is shaken left, right, up, or down), for example, from the ally character to the opposite side There is also a technique to change the display target of the liquid crystal effect to the monster located in. In this way, by making the images on the LCD screen transition while maintaining continuity, it is possible for the player to perceive the positional relationship between the characters and the surrounding environment as described above. can. When creating images such as reach effects, the above-described techniques such as cut divisions and image transitions are combined to produce one image in a more optimal form.

Also, in each scene, text telops are displayed as necessary. For example, in the "reach title display" scene (0 s to 3 s), the title telop such as "monster VS kappa" (Fig. 39 (a)), part of the scene from "monster appearance" to "mini monster appearance" (5 s In 9s), monster dialogue telops such as "Gao" are shown (Figs. 39(b) and (c)), and in the second half of the scene of "main character avoidance & set up" (17s-18s), hero dialogue telops such as "exterminate!" (Fig. 39(d)) In the scenes from "monster reappearance" to "monster attacking the hero" (32s-41s), monster dialogue telops such as "gao" (Fig. 39(e)) are displayed on the screen respectively. be done. It should be noted that the performance pattern 120 is retracted and displayed at the corner of the screen.

Here, regarding the "ready-to-win title display" scene, the display mode of the title telop, for example, the display color may be changed to suggest the reliability of the ready-to-win effect. In addition, before displaying the telop of the reach title and/or reading out the reach title (which will be described later), the first and second characters (monsters and kappa here) are displayed on the screen as characters used in the reach production. You may make it display. As a result, after the player is made aware of the contents of the ready-to-win effect, the display and voice output of the ready-to-win effect can be executed, so that the player can enjoy the ready-to-win effect more easily than when all the ready-to-win effects are displayed at once. It is possible to make it easy to grasp the contents. In addition, when the reliability differs depending on the type of character appearing in the ready-to-win production (when branching to the ready-to-win production according to the character to appear), the characters scheduled to appear are indicated in advance. By doing so, it is possible to execute the display related to the ready-to-win title after notifying the content of the ready-to-win effect at the branch destination. Also, in this case, if the reliability level is suggested by using text telops when the reach title is displayed as described above, the player will be notified of the content of the reach effect → the reliability level is suggested step by step. Since the information can be transmitted to the player at once, the player can easily grasp the information as compared with the case where the information is transmitted all at once. In addition, it is desirable to read out the reach title by voice, which will be described later, in a state in which all these contents are in place. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display the telop of the reach title, suggest the reliability, display the first and second characters that appear, etc. during or after reading the reach title. . As a result, the player can be made to feel the unexpectedness, so that the attraction of the performance at the timing of starting the ready-to-win performance can be enhanced.

In addition, in the normal sound production in the opening period, a plurality of types of BGM are sequentially reproduced according to the scene, and a sound (telop voice) corresponding to the telop displayed on the screen is reproduced. That is, when the telop related to the reach title of "Monster VS Kappa" is displayed (0s to 3s), the telop voice reading the reach title is displayed, while the telop related to the monster's dialogue is displayed (5s to 9s, 32s to 41s), During the telop display (17s to 18s) relating to the main character's lines, the main character's voice is output from the respective speakers.

At this time, when a specific voice (here, the main character's voice corresponding to the hero's dialogue telop) is output (elapsed time 17s, 18s), the playback of the BGM up to that point is paused, and when the specific sound ends, Reproduction of BGM is resumed. Also, at this time, the resumed BGM is different from the immediately preceding BGM. In this way, when a specific sound (main character's voice) is output at the timing of switching from the first BGM to the second BGM, a BGM stop period (output stop period) is provided from the stop of the first BGM to the start of the second BGM. , a specific sound (predetermined sound different from the first and second BGM) may be output during this BGM stop period. Also, in this case, at the timing when the BGM stop period ends, that is, at the timing when the second BGM is output, the scene from the ``main character avoids & prepares'' scene (first scene) to the ``main character attacks & repels mini monsters'' scene (second scene) is to be performed. Note that the BGM stop period may be a mute period during which no sound is output from the speaker.

In addition, in the normal sound production in the opening period, in addition to the telop voice corresponding to the telop, the ready-to-win production voice corresponding to each scene of the ready-to-win production is output, and the volume increase production is executed at an arbitrary timing. For example, in a part of the scene (19s-29s) of "the main character attacks and repels mini-monsters", mini-monster dialogue voices (mini-voices) that are not displayed as telops are output. In addition, in the "main character evasion & stance" scene (15s-18s), when the main character evades mini-monster attacks, an 'avoidance sound' is output, and when the main character takes a stance, a 'stance sound' is output. attacks and repels mini-monsters”, a part of the scene (21s, 31s) outputs an “attack sound” when the main character attacks and a “repulsion sound” when the mini-monsters are repelled.

In the mid-stage period of the reach variation (elapsed time 42s to 63s), a specific sound effect (operation sound) is executed in addition to the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect. During this middle stage, the image production scenes progress in the order of ``Hero pose'' → ``Monster & hero are about to collide'' ``Character effect'' ``Rainbow effect'' ``Defeat'' ``Monster falls down''.

During this middle stage, button effects and corresponding movable object effects are the main focus, and telops are not displayed on the screen except for some. First, in the scene (42 s to 48 s) of "protagonist ready" → "monster and hero are about to collide", the screen is toned down (visibility is suppressed), and after the fade-in image of the effect button 41 is displayed on the screen. (FIG. 41(f)), a button depression guidance image and a gauge image for causing the player to press the effect button 41 are displayed, and the valid operation period is started (FIG. 41(g)). The button-press guidance image is composed of, for example, a moving image showing how the effect button 41 is pressed and a character image such as "Press!". Also, the gauge image shows the remaining time of the valid period of operation, etc. in real time. At this time, the images related to the button effect, that is, the fade-in image of the button, the button press guidance image, the gauge image, etc. are excluded from the target of the tone down, and the other parts including the effect pattern 120 are the target of the tone down. Therefore, it is desirable to make the button effect-related image visually conspicuous.

In addition, during the display period (42 s to 45 s) of the fade-in image of the effect button 41, "fade-in sound" is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect, and the rotating body 44 of the movable effect means 42 swings and the board An operation sound is generated by the rising operation of the third movable body 109 (FIG. 41(f)→(g)). At this time, since the rattling motion of the rotating body 44 is relatively loud, the volume level is changed from 3 to 7 at the time point 42s when the rotating body 44 swings. The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume, is smaller than 1.2. On the other hand, the moving sound of the third board movable body 109 is about 50 dB, which is very small compared to the sound from the speaker.

Here, it is possible to provide a pattern in which the rotating body 44 does not swing during the pre-fade notification, that is, a pattern in which an operating sound such as "rattling" is not generated. Alternatively, the operation sound may be generated by swinging the first board movable body 107, the third board movable body 109, etc., instead of the rotating body.

In addition, during the display period (46s to 48s) of the button pressing guidance image, a pressing guidance voice such as "Press the button" and a "pressing guidance sound" as a volume increase effect are output from the speaker. The third movable body 109 is temporarily stopped at a predetermined position, and the second board movable body 108 swings and the rotating body 44 rotates. At the time when the button-press guidance image is displayed, the reproduction of the BGM is suspended, and the button-press guidance voice or the like is output while the BGM is stopped.

Here, the pressing guidance sound is continuously output until the player presses the effect button 41 and the effective period of the operation expires. , the output is stopped a predetermined number of times (for example, once) (47s in the example of FIG. 41), and is not continued until the end of the valid operation period. Of course, the pressing guidance voice may be continuously output until the end of the operation effective period, but in that case, the possibility that the output of the pressing guidance voice is cut off in the middle increases. In this case, if the pressing guidance voice is in the middle of being output at the end of the valid operation period, the output may be continued until the end.

When the effect button 41 is pressed during the valid operation period, the valid operation period ends and the button-press guidance image and the like are faded out from the screen (49s). Further, in the subsequent “rainbow effect” scenes (51a to 60s), for example, a rainbow effect (rainbow effect) is performed in which the entire screen becomes a rainbow color gradation.

Further, when the effect button 41 is pressed, the effect button 41 is vibrated by driving the vibrating device 72, and a "vibrating sound" is output from the speaker (49s~). In this way, by vibrating the effect button 41 when the player presses the effect button 41, the player can surely recognize the vibration. Vibration sound is generated by vibrating the production button 41 with the vibration device 72, but as described above, the volume of the specific sound production is set when the player does not touch the production button 41 (when the specific volume change operation is performed). When the player is not performing a specific volume change operation), the maximum volume is reached, and when the player touches and presses the effect button 41 (when a specific volume change operation is performed), the vibration device (driving means) 72 The driving of the effect button (predetermined portion) 41 by the touch is limited, and the volume of the vibration sound is suppressed compared to the state in which the effect button 41 is not touched. Therefore, by outputting a "vibration sound" from a speaker when vibrating the effect button 41, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in volume of the actual vibration sound.

As described above, the volume can be changed by the normal sound effect by the player operating the volume control means 39 even when the normal sound effect is not being executed. A change in the sound volume due to the specific sound effect by touching or pressing the finger 41 can be executed only while the specific sound effect is being executed. Note that the "vibration sound" from this speaker may be output only during the vibration period (49s to 53s) of the effect button 41, but in the example of FIG. After that, for a certain period of time (up to 56s), the "vibrating sound" is continuously output from the speaker.

Here, the vibrating sound (normal sound effect) output from the speaker may be output in a shorter period than the actual vibrating effect and the vibrating sound (specific sound effect) generated therewith. Also, a plurality of types of vibrating sounds may be provided to be output from the speaker. Further, it may be configured such that a plurality of vibration sounds are respectively output from the speaker according to the actual vibration effect and the length and vibration pattern of the vibration sounds generated accordingly. In addition, even if the length of the actual vibrating effect and the vibrating sound that accompanies the vibrating sound and the vibration pattern are different, one type of vibrating sound may be output from the speaker. The vibrating sound output from the speaker is preferably similar to the vibrating sound generated with the actual vibrating performance, but is not limited to this, and may not be similar to the vibrating sound output from the speaker. Even in this case, by outputting the vibration sound in parallel with the actual vibration sound, both of them can synchronize and cooperate to generate a unique vibration sound, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, when the vibration sound is actually output from the speaker, there may be a case where the vibration sound is output and a case where the vibration sound is not output. In addition, when executing a vibration effect at the end of the reach to notify the winning or losing, a vibrating sound is output from the speaker, and when executing a vibration effect as a suggestion of reliability during fluctuation, vibration from the speaker It may be configured not to output sound. With this, it is possible to configure different rendering modes according to the role of the vibration rendering. Of course, it is configured to output a vibrating sound from the speaker both in the case of executing the vibration effect at the time of the effect of notifying the win or loss at the end of the reach and in the case of executing the vibration effect as an indication of the reliability during the fluctuation. good too.

Further, when the effect button 41 is pressed, the following post-operation effects are executed by the movable bodies 107 to 109 (49s to 54s). That is, the board third movable body 109 resumes its upward movement (from 49s), and when it reaches the maximum operating position, it waits at that position (from 51s). Subsequently, the first board movable body 107 starts to move downward (from 51s), reaches the maximum operating position, and vertically integrates with the third board movable body 109 (53s). An effect is performed, and as shown in FIG. 41(h), for example, the board second movable body 108 rotates (53s to 54s). During this post-operation effect, a "moving sound" corresponding to the motion of the movable bodies 107 to 109 is output from the speaker as a sound volume increase effect. Also, at a predetermined timing after the effect button 41 is pressed, the reproduction of the BGM is started after the button is pressed (52s~).

When the post-operation effect (49s to 54s) ends, the first board movable body 107 and the third board movable body 109 start to move to their respective origin positions (FIG. 41(h)→(i)). At a predetermined timing during movement, the main character's voice corresponding to successful button depression is output from the speaker, and at the timing when the movable bodies 107 and 109 reach their respective origin positions, the speaker emits a "home return sound" as a volume increase effect. ' is output.

In the "defeat" and "monster fall" scenes (61s-63s) after the end of "Rainbow Effect", the hero's lines are displayed on the screen, and the main character's voice corresponding to the lines is output from the speaker. Finally, the words of the fallen monster (monster voice) are output. It should be noted that the reproduction of the BGM is stopped during the "defeat" scene, and when the "monster falls down" scene starts (62s), reproduction of a new BGM is started in the middle of outputting the voice of the main character.

FIG. 43-1 shows the volume of the normal sound effect and the volume of the specific sound effect separately for the period from 42s to 61s in FIG. As shown in FIG. 43-1, from 42 s in which the rotating body 44 swings and the third board movable body 109 rises as the specific sound effect, to 43 s in which only the third board movable body 109 rises. After ~45s, in the period from 46s to 47s when the rotation of the rotating body 44 and the swinging motion of the second movable board 108 are performed, the volume of the specific sound effect is set at all the volume levels that can be set. It is smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect.

After that, at the point of 48s, as the specific sound effect, the shaking motion of the second movable body 108 of the board ends and only the rotating motion of the rotating body 44 is performed. Also, since the BGM is stopped and the pressing guidance voice ends and the volume drops sharply, the volume of the specific sound effect is louder than the volume of the normal sound effect in the case of the minimum volume level 3. It is smaller than the volume of the normal sound production at volume level 4 above.

Subsequently, during the period from 49s to 53s in which the vibration sound of the effect button 41 is generated, the volume of the specific sound effect is kept higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3. Specifically, the volume of the specific sound effect in the period from 49s to 52s is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3 and smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 4, and 53s. The volume of the specific sound effect at the point of time is higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at volume level 4 and smaller than the volume of normal sound effect at volume level 5.例文帳に追加After 54s after the end of the vibration sound of the effect button 41, except for 55s when the volume of the normal sound effect drops sharply, the volume of the specific sound effect is the normal sound effect in the case of all settable volume levels. is lower than the volume of

In the final period of the reach variation (elapsed time 64s-98s), the image presentation and the corresponding normal sound presentation are performed, and the specific sound presentation (operation sound) is not performed except for the vibration sound of 93s-95s.

In this final period, the image production scene is "The hero chases & defeats the monster trying to attack again" → "Golden effect" → "Black background" → "Golden effect" → "The hero waves the flag. ”→”Golden Effect”.

In the scene of "the main character pursues and defeats a monster that is about to attack again", after the effect pattern 120 in retreat display is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in 42(k), it temporarily stops in a normal jackpot mode such as "4.4.4" (70s-77s). During this scene, for example, before the enlarged display of the effect pattern 120 (64s to 67s), the main character's lines are displayed as telops, and the main character's voice corresponding to the lines is output. Also, as a volume increase effect. A "beating sound" or the like is output from the speaker when the monster is defeated.

In the subsequent "golden effect" scene (78s-80s), as shown in FIG. A re-fluctuation (full rotation) is started, the BGM is switched, and a "re-fluctuation sound" is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect.

Then, the button effect is performed again in the next scene of "golden effect" across the "black background" where the entire screen is blacked out. That is, after the pre-fade notification is performed on the screen from the end of the "black background" to the beginning of the "golden effect" (FIG. 43(m)), the fade-in image of the effect button 41 is displayed (FIG. 43(n)). )), a button-pressing guidance image and a gauge image are then displayed, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 43(o)). Note that in the pre-fade notification, for example, an image in which the effect button 41 rotates is displayed.

In addition, after the pre-button effect voice for notifying the start of the button effect is output at the timing straddling the button fade-in from the pre-fade notification, the pressing guidance voice such as "Press the button" is displayed in the button pressing guidance image. is output after the display of Furthermore, as a volume increase effect, a "background changing sound" is output from the speaker during the "black background" scene, and a "fade-in sound" is output during the display of the fade-in image.

Regarding the content of pre-fade notification, when blacked out, the effect button image, an image similar to the effect button image, or a related image for deriving the effect button image is displayed, and these images are blacked out images. 43(m)). As a result, the player can perceive that the operation timing of the performance button 41 will come soon before the fade-in image of the performance button image and the operation button image is actually displayed.

Here, whether or not to execute the pre-fade notification may be determined according to the reliability of the operation effect or the ready-to-win effect. The possibility that the subsequent operation effect will be successful than if it is not executed (if the operation result indicates that the change is a win, success = big hit notification, otherwise, the operation effect will be successful). As a result, an effect suggesting a predetermined degree of reliability is executed) may be configured to increase. Further, when the pre-fade notification is executed, it may be configured such that the subsequent operation effect is always successful.

As described above, by blacking out the background at the time of the pre-fade notification, the visibility of the scene image on the screen is reduced, and the pre-fade notification can be performed using the entire liquid crystal screen. It is conceivable that the user's consciousness and attention can be directed from the scene image to the pre-fade notification, but a screen mode other than blackout (black background) may be executed to make the pre-fade notification stand out. The screen mode is a screen mode (at least a scene image) that is more conspicuous than the scene image (scene moving image) that has been executed prior to the execution of the pre-fade notification and that is being executed in a hierarchy with a low display priority even during the execution of the pre-fade notification. It is sufficient if the display priority is set higher than that of the image).

As for the pre-button effect voice, any voice content that suggests the appearance of the operation effect to be executed thereafter may be used. Also, the reliability may be varied depending on the content of the voice before the button effect. It may be configured to suggest the reliability of the operation presentation by the content of the voice to be played. Also, not limited to this, for example, when there are a plurality of operation buttons used in operation effects, a voice with a high possibility of deriving an operation button with high reliability or an operation button with high reliability is derived. A voice with a low probability may be prepared.

Further, as a form of pre-fade notification, the content of the pre-button effect voice that is executed substantially at the same time may be displayed as lines. In this case, unlike the telops displayed during the reach, the words, which are the contents of the voice to be reproduced, may be displayed as characters in a manner that uses the entire liquid crystal screen.

Also, the scene is switched during execution of the pre-fade notification, but in this case, the scene is switched in a display layer having a lower display priority than the pre-fade notification, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. , the scene can be switched during execution of the pre-fade notification. In that case, the switching scene image may be configured so that the player can visually recognize it. It may be configured such that the state in which the scene image is switched can be visually recognized. As a result, the pre-fade notification can improve the interest of the production, and the player can also visually recognize the switching of the scene images, so that the player can grasp the connection of the scene images and feel more uncomfortable. It is possible to produce a performance without

In addition, by configuring the scene image to progress behind the pre-fade notification in this way, even if the ready-to-win effect is executed in a pattern in which the pre-fade notification is not executed, it will appear visually Since the content of the effect progresses as the scene image progresses, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win effect without making the player feel uncomfortable. In this way, by switching the scene image during execution of the pre-fade notification, or advancing the content of the scene image without switching, it is possible to achieve the effects described above.

When the effect button 41 is pressed during the valid period of operation, the valid period of operation ends and the scene "the main character waves the flag" (FIG. 43(p)) starts, and the button-press guidance image and the like are displayed from the screen. faded out. Also, after the main character's voice regarding the re-lottery of symbols is output, a "flag waving sound" is output as a volume increase effect.

From the end of the scene "the main character waves the flag" to the beginning of the "golden effect", after the effect pattern 120 being changed again is enlarged and displayed (93s-94s), as shown in FIG. 7.7” or the like is finally stopped and confirmed (95s-98s). In addition, from the enlarged display of the production pattern 120 to the final stop (93 s to 95 s), the production button 41 is vibrated by driving the vibration device 72, and the "vibration sound" is output from the speaker (normal sound production). A special production that is performed together with a sound production). This is an example of a big-hit notification effect (second special effect) capable of informing that the stopped symbols will be in a big-hit mode (specific mode). It should be noted that this big hit notification effect (second special effect) is different from the big hit suggestion effect (first special effect) shown in FIG. (BGM, vibration sound, etc.) from the speaker is relatively loud. Also, this big hit notification effect (second special effect) has a longer effect time than the big win suggestion effect (first special effect) shown in FIG.

FIG. 43-2 shows the volume of the normal sound effect and the volume of the specific sound effect separately for the period from 92s to 96s in FIG. As shown in FIG. 43-2, during the period from 93s to 95s when the vibration sound of the effect button 41 is generated as the specific sound effect, the volume of the specific sound effect is the normal sound effect in the case of the minimum volume level 3. A state that is louder than the volume is maintained. Specifically, the volume of the specific sound effect at the time points of 93s and 95s is higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3 and smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 4, The volume of the specific sound effect at the time of 94s is higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at volume level 4 and smaller than the volume of normal sound effect at volume level 5.例文帳に追加

Next, a ready-to-win effect B (big hit reliability high) shown in FIGS. 44 to 48 will be described. In the ready-to-reach production B shown in FIGS. 44 to 48, similar to the ready-to-reach production A shown in FIGS. 39 to 43, the theme of the battle between the monster and the kappa, the main character, is performed. In the initial stage period (elapsed time 0s to 39s) of the ready-to-win effect, the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect are executed, and the specific sound effect (operation sound) is not executed.

In this initial period, the scene of the image production is "reach title display" (Fig. 44 (a)) → "main character (kappa) appearance" (Fig. 44 (b)) → "mutually repeat attack and dodge" (Fig. 44 (c)) → "monster defense" → "monster counterattack" (Fig. 45 (d)) → "ally character" → "monster avoidance" → "monster counterattack" → "mutual attack and defense" (Fig. 45 (e)) → The game progresses in the order of ``holding up the main character''->``setting up a monster & launching an attack'', and each of these scenes consists of one or more cuts.

In each of these scenes, character telops are displayed as necessary. For example, in the "reach title display" scene (0s to 3s), the title telop such as "Monster VS Kappa" is displayed (Fig. 44(a)), and in the "main character (kappa) appearance" scene (4s to 13s), the main character's lines are displayed. A telop (FIG. 44(b)) is displayed on the screen. Also, the effect pattern 120 is displayed in a retracted manner at the corner of the screen.

The reach title of this reach effect B is "Monster VS Kappa" like the reach effect A, but the display mode of the title telop is different from the reach effect A (Fig. 39 (a)) with low reliability of the big hit. there is In this way, the display mode of the reach title may be configured to suggest the reliability. Various examples have already been shown for the "ready-to-win title display" scene (FIG. 39) in the ready-to-win effect A, and all of these examples are applicable to this ready-to-win effect B as well.

In addition, in the normal sound production in the opening period, a plurality of types of BGM are sequentially reproduced according to the scene, and a sound (telop voice) corresponding to the telop displayed on the screen is reproduced. That is, when the telop related to the reach title of "Monster VS Kappa" is displayed (0s to 3s), the telop voice for reading the reach title is displayed, and while the telop related to the main character's dialogue is displayed (4s to 13s, 35s), the main character's voice is displayed. The monster voice is output from the speaker during the display of the telops regarding lines (22s, 28s, 38s to 39s), and the friend's voice is output during the display of the telops regarding the line of the ally character (26s).

Further, in the example of FIG. 44, when switching from the ready-to-win effect BGM1 to the ready-to-win effect BGM2 (elapsed time 14 s), the BGM stop period ( Output stop period) is provided, and at the timing of executing the reach effect BGM2 (second BGM), a scene from ``appearance of the main character (kappa)'' (1st scene) to ``repeating attacks and dodges each other'' (2nd scene) Changes are coming. Also, during the BGM stop period, a "change sound" (predetermined sound different from the first and second BGM) for emphasizing the scene change is output. Note that the BGM stop period may be a mute period during which no sound is output from the speaker.

In addition, in the normal sound production in the opening period, in addition to the telop voice corresponding to the telop, the ready-to-win production voice corresponding to each scene of the ready-to-win production is output, and the volume increase production is executed at an arbitrary timing. For example, in a part of the scene (16s) where "each other repeatedly attacks and dodges", the monster's dialogue voice (monster voice) that is not displayed as a telop is output, and similarly a part of the "monster counterattack" scene ( In 23s), a monster voice is output, and in the "mutual offense and defense" scene, in 29s, the ally voice of the ally character is output, in 31s, the monster voice is output, and in 33s, the main character's voice is output. Here, in the "attack and defense against each other" scene (FIG. 45(e)), the main character and the monster appear on the screen, and the allied character does not appear, but the voices of the main character, the monster, and the allied character appear. Sound is being output. In other words, the ally characters (characters less important than the main character) do not appear as images on the screen, and only voices such as lines are output.

In addition, for example, in the "Reach title display" scene (0s to 3s), an "emphasized sound" is output in response to the reading voice of the Reach title, and a part of the "Main character (kappa) appearance" scene (6s to 8s, 12s and 14s), "action sounds" are output corresponding to various actions of the main character, and the above-mentioned "change sounds" are output at the end of the scene. , "Counterattack sound" is output in response to the counterattack action of the monster. Note that in the ready-to-win effect A (FIG. 39), no emphatic sound is output during the "ready-to-win title display". In this way, during the telop display of the reach title, whether or not to output a sound (other than the BGM) other than the telop voice corresponding to the telop display, or the type of the sound (including BGM) suggests the reliability. It may be configured as

It should be noted that it is desirable to display the corresponding ally character as a scene image while the ally voice 1 is being output (20 s to 21 s) during the initial period. In that case, it is desirable to also display a telop image corresponding to the voice. The telop image may indicate the reliability of the ready-to-win effect by changing the display mode (display color, etc.). Of course, even when the teammate voice 1 is being output and the corresponding teammate character is displayed as a scene image, the telop image may not be displayed.

Also, when the scene is expressed so that the corresponding ally character is not displayed in the scene image, such as during the output of ally voice 2 (29s), only the voice may be played and the telop image may not be displayed. . In this manner, the expression of scene images and telop images (whether or not they are displayed, etc.) may be changed according to the content of the voice to be reproduced. Also, even when the teammate voice 2 is being output and the corresponding teammate character is not displayed in the scene image, the telop image may be displayed. Originally, it is desirable not to display the telop image when the image of the corresponding ally character is not displayed, but when using the telop image to suggest the reliability, display the telop image. may be configured.

In this embodiment, the expression method is changed as described above according to the type of voice. may be configured to always display both a character image (scene image) and a telop image, or any one of them. On the other hand, for characters that are less important than the main character, such as ally characters, both the character image (scene image) and the telop image, or either of them, are not displayed even during voice output. You may In this way, it is also possible to vary the effect mode during voice output as described above, according to the importance of the target character, the degree of contribution during reach, the display frequency, and the like. Also, even if the character is the same character, the effect mode may be changed as described above according to the progress level and content of the ready-to-win effect. By configuring in this way, when there is a character with a relatively high frequency of speaking or a character with a low frequency of speaking in the ready-to-win production, each time the voice of the character is reproduced, the scene image can be switched. There is no need to display characters, and the number of scene images can be reduced to reduce performance data. Also, when creating a scene image, it is possible to create a scene image with a high degree of freedom without being bound by the output voice.

Also, in the ready-to-win effect, in a scene in which a character whose voice is to be output utters a line for the first time, it is desirable to display the character corresponding to the voice output in the scene image. Moreover, it is more preferable to display a telop image at that time. Also, at that time, the telop image may be changed in a mode according to the reliability. Also, when outputting the voice after that, it is not necessary to display the corresponding character as a scene image or to display a telop image. It is desirable to configure such a production mode as shown below.

Also, when the voice is output, if the corresponding character is not displayed in the scene image, it is desirable not to display the other characters as well. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the voice being output is the voice of a different character. In that case, it is desirable to display a background image or the like on the screen. Also, even if a character different from the character corresponding to the voice is displayed, for example, when an ally character's voice is output, a different ally character is displayed, and when an enemy character's voice is output, a different enemy character is displayed. It is desirable to display a character having the same attribute as the character to be played, so that the contents of the lines are not confused between characters with different attributes such as friends and enemies. On the other hand, when the voice of the ally character is reproduced, a character having different attributes from the character corresponding to the voice may be intentionally displayed, such as displaying an enemy character. Depending on the situation, it may work more effectively. In addition, the attributes of characters with different attributes are not limited to enemy/ally, but include gender, good/bad, animal types, and various other attributes.

In the mid-stage period of the reach variation (elapsed time 40s to 67s), in addition to the image presentation and the corresponding normal sound presentation, the specific sound presentation (operation sound) by the movable body presentation is executed. During this mid-stage period, the image production scenes progress in the order of "protagonist set up" → "button production effect background" → "character effect" → "rainbow effect" → "monster falls down".

First of all, in the scene (40s-41s) where the main character is set up, after the monster's dialogue (monster voice) is output from the speaker, the main character's dialogue is displayed on the screen across the next "button production effect background". A telop is displayed, and the lines of the main character (main character voice) corresponding to the telop display are output from the speaker.

Further, when the "button production effect background" scene (42s to 48s) is started, after the pre-fade notification is performed on the screen (FIG. 46(f)), the fade-in image of the production button 41 is displayed ( FIG. 46(g)), then a button-pressing guide image and a gauge image are displayed, and the valid operation period starts (FIG. 46(h)). Note that in the pre-fade notification, for example, an image in which the effect button 41 rotates is displayed. In addition, after the voice before button performance for notifying the start of button performance is output during the pre-fade notification, the pressing guidance voice such as "press the button" is output after the display of the button pressing guidance image is started.

In this ready-to-win effect B, blackout (black background) is not performed at the time of pre-fade notification, but blackout (black background) may be performed similarly to the ready-to-win effect A. Also, the reliability may be suggested by whether or not blackout is executed, or by the type of screen mode including the blackout. In addition, although various examples have already been given regarding the pre-fade notification in the ready-to-win effect A, all of these examples are applicable to this ready-to-win effect B as well.

Also, during the pre-fade notification on the screen, a "pre-fade notification sound" is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect, the rotating body 44 of the movable effect means 42 swings, and the board third movable body 109 rises. An action sound is generated by the action. At this time, since the operation sound such as "rattling" caused by the swinging motion of the rotating body 44 is relatively loud, the sound volume level was changed from 3 to 7 at the time of 42s to 44s when the swinging motion of the rotating body 44 was performed. The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in the volume in the case of 1.2, is smaller than 1.2. On the other hand, the moving sound of the third board movable body 109 is about 50 dB, which is very small compared to the sound from the speaker. .2.

Here, it is possible to provide a pattern in which the rotating body 44 does not swing at the pre-fade notification, that is, a pattern in which an operating sound such as "rattling" is not generated. Alternatively, the operation sound may be generated by swinging the first board movable body 107, the third board movable body 109, etc., instead of the rotating body.

In addition, during the display period (46s to 48s) of the button pressing guidance image, a pressing guidance voice such as "Press the button" and a "pressing guidance sound" as a volume increase effect are output from the speaker. The third movable body 109 is temporarily stopped at a predetermined position, and the second board movable body 108 swings and the rotating body 44 rotates. At the time when the button-press guidance image is displayed, the reproduction of the BGM is suspended, and the button-press guidance voice or the like is output while the BGM is stopped.

When the effect button 41 is pressed during the valid operation period, the valid operation period ends, and the button press guidance image and the like are faded out from the screen (49s to 50s). Further, in subsequent “rainbow effect” scenes (51a to 60s), for example, a rainbow effect is performed in which the entire screen becomes a rainbow color gradation.

Further, when the effect button 41 is pressed, the effect button 41 is vibrated by driving the vibrating device 72, and a "vibrating sound" is output from the speaker (49s~). In this way, by vibrating the effect button 41 when the player presses the effect button 41, the player can surely recognize the vibration. Vibration sound is generated by vibrating the production button 41 with the vibration device 72, but as described above, the volume of the specific sound production is set when the player does not touch the production button 41 (when the specific volume change operation is performed). When the player is not performing a specific volume change operation), the maximum volume is reached, and when the player touches and presses the effect button 41 (when a specific volume change operation is performed), the vibration device (driving means) 72 The driving of the effect button (predetermined portion) 41 by the touch is limited, and the volume of the vibration sound is suppressed compared to the state in which the effect button 41 is not touched. Therefore, by outputting a "vibration sound" from a speaker when vibrating the effect button 41, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in volume of the actual vibration sound. Note that the "vibration sound" from this speaker may be output only during the vibration period (49s to 53s) of the effect button 41, but in the example of FIG. After that, for a certain period of time (up to 56s), the "vibrating sound" is continuously output from the speaker.

Although various examples have already been given regarding the vibration effect in the ready-to-win effect A and the vibration sound output from the speaker performed in parallel with it, all of these examples are applicable to this ready-to-win effect B as well.

Further, when the effect button 41 is pressed, the following post-operation effects are executed by the movable bodies 107 to 109 (49s to 54s). That is, the board third movable body 109 resumes its upward movement (from 49s), and when it reaches the maximum operating position, it waits at that position (from 51s). Subsequently, the first board movable body 107 starts to move downward (51s~), reaches the maximum operating position, and vertically integrates with the third board movable body 109 (53s), as shown in FIG. 46(i). As shown, the movable bodies 107 to 109 are brought together, and for example, the board second movable body 108 rotates (53s to 54s). During this post-operation effect, a "moving sound" corresponding to the motion of the movable bodies 107 to 109 is output from the speaker as a sound volume increase effect. At a predetermined timing after the effect button 41 is pressed, the reproduction of the BGM is started after the button is pressed (52s~).

When the post-operation effect (49s to 54s) ends, the first board movable body 107 and the third board movable body 109 start to move to their respective origin positions (FIG. 46(i)→(j)). At a predetermined timing during movement, the main character's voice corresponding to successful button depression is output from the speaker, and at the timing when each of the movable bodies 107 and 109 reaches their respective origin positions, a "return to origin sound" is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect. ' is output.

In the "Monster Falls" scene (61s-67s) after the end of "Rainbow Effect", the dialogue of the monster just before it collapses is displayed on the screen, and the monster's voice corresponding to that dialogue is output from the speaker. Finally, when the monster falls (FIG. 47(k)), the monster voice is output again, and a "falling sound" is output as a volume increase effect. When the scene is changed from "Rainbow Effect" to "Monster Falls", the BGM stops almost at the same time as the scene change. It is supposed to start.

FIG. 48-1 shows the volume of the normal sound effect and the volume of the specific sound effect separately for the period from 42s to 61s in FIG. As shown in FIG. 48-1, from 42s to 44s in which the rotating body 44 swings and the third board movable body 109 rises as the specific sound production, only the third board movable body 109 rises. After 45 s, the rotary motion of the rotating body 44 and the shaking motion of the second movable board 108 are performed. It is smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect.

After that, at time 48s, as the specific sound effect, the shaking motion of the second movable body 108 of the board ends and only the rotating motion of the rotating body 44 is performed. Also, since the BGM is stopped and the pressing guidance voice ends and the volume drops sharply, the volume of the specific sound effect is louder than the volume of the normal sound effect in the case of the minimum volume level 3. It is smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect in the case of volume level 4 above.

Subsequently, during the period from 49s to 53s in which the vibration sound of the effect button 41 is generated, the volume of the specific sound effect is kept higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3. Specifically, the volume of the specific sound effect in the period from 49s to 52s is higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3 and smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 4, and 53s. The volume of the specific sound effect at the point of time is higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at volume level 4 and smaller than the volume of normal sound effect at volume level 5.例文帳に追加After 54s after the end of the vibration sound of the effect button 41, except for 55s when the volume of the normal sound effect drops sharply, the volume of the specific sound effect is the normal sound effect in the case of all settable volume levels. is lower than the volume of

In the final period of the reach fluctuation (elapsed time 68s to 98s), the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect are executed, and the specific sound effect (operation sound) is not executed. In this final period, the image production scene is "Main character Banzai" → "Golden curtain" → "Golden effect" → "Golden effect & Golden curtain" → "Golden effect" → "Golden curtain" → "Gold folding screen" ”.

In the scene of "Banzai the main character", after the effect pattern 120 in the evacuation display is enlarged (68s to 73s) as shown in FIG. 47(l), as shown in FIG. 4” or the like is temporarily stopped in a normal jackpot mode (74s to 77s). Then, in the subsequent "golden curtain" scene, the BGM is changed, and as shown in FIG. ' is output. Then, in the "golden effect" scene, as shown in FIG. 47(o), a golden effect is executed in which the entire screen becomes gold, and the production pattern 120 reappears to start re-fluctuation (full rotation).

In the subsequent “golden effect & golden curtain” scene (82s to 89s), the production pattern 120 continues to change, and the production pattern 120 is hidden by the golden curtain (Fig. 48(p)) and non-existent. The hidden state (FIG. 48(q)) is alternately repeated. Further, after passing through the “golden effect” and “golden curtain” scenes (90s-93s), in the “golden folding screen” scene (94s-98s), the re-changing production pattern 120 is displayed against the background of the golden folding screen. After the display is enlarged (94s-95s), as shown in FIG. 48(r), it is finally stopped in a normal jackpot mode such as "4.4.4" and confirmed (96s-98s).

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the volume of the execution sound when the sound effect is executed when the volume is set to the first setting volume and when the volume is set to the second setting volume A non-specific period in which the ratio is a first volume ratio and a specific period in which the volume ratio is a second volume ratio smaller than the first volume ratio are provided, and during the non-specific period, the normal sound effect is executed, but the specific sound effect is performed. is not executed, and the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect are executed during the specific period. Further, the second set volume is the upper limit of the set volume that can be changed by the set volume changing means based on the volume adjustment operation by the player, and the volume of the specific sound effect is set to the second set volume. The volume is set lower than the normal sound production during the specific period.

Further, based on the volume adjustment operation by the player, the volume level in the normal sound effect is changed to at least a first level, a second level having a volume higher than the first level, and a volume higher than the second level. A first volume level changing means capable of changing to a third level that is increased, and a second volume level changing means capable of changing the volume level without depending on the volume adjustment operation based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, When set to the first level by the first sound volume level changing means, the volume of the normal sound effect is set to be more difficult to hear than the specific sound effect, and when set to the third level. , the volume of the normal sound effect is set to be easier to hear than the specific sound effect, and when the second level is set, the first level is set and/or the third The difference between the volume of the specific sound effect and the volume of the normal sound effect is set to be smaller than when the level is set, and the second volume level changing means changes the volume when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The level is changed to the second level.

Further, the sound volume of the execution sound when the normal sound effect is executed differs between the normal game state and the special game state, and the sound volume level changing means can When set to the minimum volume level, the volume of the normal sound effect is set to be more difficult to hear than the specific sound effect, and when set to the maximum volume level, the sound effect is set to be louder than the specific sound effect. The volume of normal sound effect is set so that it is easy to hear.

In addition, a first special effect that can suggest the possibility that the stop symbol will be in a specific mode when the specific sound effect is executed during the execution of the normal sound effect, and the specific sound effect is executed during the execution of the normal sound effect. A second special performance capable of notifying that the stop pattern will be in a specific mode when the second special performance is executed, and the first special performance has a volume of the normal sound performance with respect to the volume of the specific sound performance compared to the second special performance. is configured to be relatively small. Furthermore, the presentation time of the second special presentation is made longer than the presentation time of the first special presentation.

Further, the volume of the normal sound effect can be changed based on the normal volume change operation by the player, the volume of the specific sound effect can be changed based on the specific sound volume change operation by the player, and the volume by the normal volume change operation can be executed even when the normal sound effect is not being executed, and the volume change by the specific sound volume change operation can be executed only while the specific sound effect is being executed. Furthermore, the specific sound volume change operation is a contact and/or pressing action on a predetermined part, and during execution of the specific sound effect, it is possible to execute an operation guidance notification that guides the player to the specific sound volume change operation.

In addition, it comprises a display effect executing means capable of executing a display effect composed of a series of moving images connecting a plurality of scenes, and a sound effect executing means capable of executing a sound effect outputting sound from the audio output means, During execution of the display effect, the sound effect executing means starts executing the second sound effect after the first sound effect is executed, and after a silence period in which no sound is output from the sound output means, the display effect executing means The scene of the display effect is changed from the first scene to the second scene at the timing of executing the second sound effect. Further, the sound effect executing means starts outputting the second BGM after the BGM stop period after stopping the output of the first BGM, and the display effect executing means changes the scene of the display effect from the first scene at the timing of outputting the second BGM. It is designed to change to the second scene. Further, during the period when the BGM is stopped, a predetermined sound different from each BGM is output from the audio output means.

In addition, it is possible to execute a specific notice during the variable display of the pattern, and the specific notice includes a first half section that does not yet suggest the possibility of the specific mode, and a second half section that suggests the possibility of the specific mode after the first half section. and has an audio output means capable of outputting a sound relating to the specific notice when executing the specific notice, wherein the audio output means outputs the sound relating to the specific notice at a first volume when executing the first half section , the second half section is executed, the sound relating to the specific notice is output at a second volume that is higher than the first volume. Further, after execution of the first half section and before execution of the second half section, the sound relating to the specific notice is output at a third volume that is lower than the first volume.

FIGS. 49 to 52 illustrate the second embodiment of the present invention, in which the volume level setting table in the first embodiment is changed to change the volume level adjustable range for each hall setting value. showing. Note that portions that are not particularly mentioned in the following description are common to the first embodiment.

In the sound volume level setting table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, for the normal mode hole setting values (value A) T3 to T7, the player setting values (value B) M1 to M5 The level changes by a predetermined step value, and the predetermined step value differs for each of the hall set values T3 to T7, and the greater the hall set value, the greater the predetermined step value. Further, the volume level corresponding to the minimum player set value M1 is the same for all of the hall set values T3 to T7. For example, the volume levels corresponding to the hall set value T3 are 3, 6, 9, 12, and 15 corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5. On the other hand, the sound volume levels corresponding to the hole set value T7 are 3, 10, 17, 24, and 31 corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5, and the predetermined step value is 7 in this case.

As described above, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (A operation means) 140, and the first A value is selected by operation of the volume operation means (B operation means) 39. When the 1st Otsu value (eg M1) is selected, the first predetermined value (eg 3) is set, the 1st A value (eg T3) is selected, and the 2nd Otsu value that is larger than the 1st Otsu value (for example, M2) is selected, the second predetermined value (for example, 6) is set, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and the first B value (for example, M1) is selected, the third A predetermined value (eg, 3) is set, the second A value (eg, T4) is selected, and when the second B value (eg, M2) is selected, a fourth predetermined value (eg, 7) is set, and the first The amount of change (eg, 3) between the predetermined value and the second predetermined value is made different from the amount of change (eg, 4) between the third predetermined value and the fourth predetermined value, and the first A value (eg, T3) is selected. , when the upper limit B value at that time (eg M5) is selected, the first upper limit predetermined value (eg 15) is set, the second A value (eg T4) is selected, and the upper limit B value at that time ( For example, when M5) is selected, a second upper limit predetermined value (for example, 19) is set, and since the first upper limit value and the second upper limit value are different, the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated on the game hall side. By doing so, it is possible for the player to change the adjustable range of the sound volume level. Moreover, since the first predetermined value and the third predetermined value are the same, it is possible to change the upper limit of the volume adjustable range by operating the volume control knob 140 .

In addition, while the volume of the normal sound effect changes according to the volume level setting, the volume of the specific sound effect is constant regardless of the volume level setting. When the first A value (for example, M3) is selected by the means) 39, the second A value (for example, T4 ) is selected, the volume of the normal sound effect is relatively higher than the volume of the specific sound effect.

In this embodiment, the initial position (default player setting value) differs for each of the normal mode hole setting values T3 to T7. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the initial positions for the hall set values T3 to T7 are M1 to M5, respectively. is also large.

The hall set value T8 for the power saving mode is, for example, the same setting as the hall set value T3, which has the smallest upper limit value of the sound volume level among the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. Further, the hall set value T9 for the power saving mode is set to be the same as the hall set value T7, which has the largest upper limit value of the sound volume level among the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, for example. The same is true for the initial position.

Further, among the hall set values T0 to T2 that are not normally selected on the game hall side, in the hall set value T0 for silence, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5 are all 0 (silence). The hall set value T1 is for presentation, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum level player set value M1 is 1, and the volume levels corresponding to the other player set values M2 to M5 are the same as, for example, the hall set value T3. It has become. The hall set value T2 is for factory shipment, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum stage player set value M1 is 2, and the sound volume level corresponding to the other player set values M2 to M5 is, for example, the hall set value T3. is the same as The initial positions for the hole set values T0 to T2 are all set to the minimum M1, for example.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, regardless of the player's set value by the volume operation means 39, the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall set value at that time (here, the player's set value volume level corresponding to M5). As described above, the volume level of the error sound is always the upper limit value corresponding to the hole set value at that time, and thus cannot be changed by the player operating the volume control means 39. It is possible for the user to change the volume by operating the volume control knob 140 .

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, since the initial position differs for each hole setting value, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the first As in the embodiment, both the volume level and the volume adjustment notification image PV change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50E, when the hole setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M1 (initial position), the hole setting value is displayed while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. is changed in order of T3->T4->T5->T6->T7, the volume level changes in order of 3->7->13->21->31 according to the initial position corresponding to the hall setting value after change, and the volume is adjusted. The notification image PV also changes sequentially in the order of PV1→PV2→PV3→PV4→PV5 in accordance with the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

51 and 52 are obtained by modifying FIG. 34 in the first embodiment in accordance with the present embodiment. When the upper limit value is set to T7 (first selection value) where the maximum value is set, the player setting value (volume setting value) by the volume operation means (first operation means) 39 is set to M1 (first volume setting value) to M5 Fig. 51 shows the change in volume when set to (second volume setting value). FIG. 52 shows changes in volume when the player setting value (volume setting value) is set to M1 (first volume setting value) to M5 (second volume setting value). As shown in FIG. 49, when the hole setting value is set to T3 (second selection value) and when it is set to T7 (first selection value), the case of setting the hole setting value to T3 is higher than that of the player setting value. The volume level (second corresponding volume level) when the value is set to M5 (second volume setting value) is low. Also, the volumes corresponding to volume levels 3 (first corresponding volume level), 10, 17, 24 and 31 (second corresponding volume level) in FIG. It is made to be common with the corresponding volume.

Comparing FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the lower limit value (first corresponding volume level) of the volume level is common, and the upper limit value (second corresponding volume level) is lower in FIG. 52 (1.097) is smaller than that in FIG. 51 (1.200). 51 in which the hole set value is set to T7 (first selection value) and in the case of FIG. 52 in which the hole set value is set to T3 (second selection value), the player When the set value is set to M1 (first volume set value), the volume of the specific sound effect is louder than the volume of the normal sound effect, and the volume of the specific sound effect is easier to hear than the normal sound effect. It has become. 51 in which the hole set value is set to T7 (first selection value) and in the case of FIG. 52 in which the hole set value is set to T3 (second selection value), the player When the setting value is set to M5 (second volume setting value), the volume of the specific sound effect is smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect, and the volume of the specific sound effect is difficult to hear compared to the normal sound effect. It has become.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first B value is selected by the volume operation means (B operation means) 39, the volume adjustment knob (A operation means) 140 selects the first A value. The volume of the normal sound effect is relatively higher than the volume of the specific sound effect when the second first value is selected.

In addition, a volume for changing the player setting value (volume setting value) regarding the volume level of the normal sound effect to M1 (first volume setting value) and M5 (second volume setting value) is arranged on the front side of the main body. A volume operation means (first operation means) 39 capable of changing the setting value, and a plurality of hall setting values (selection values) arranged on the rear side of the main body, M1 (first volume setting value) and a second corresponding volume level corresponding to M5 (second volume setting value), and a plurality of hall setting values. (Selection value) includes at least T7 (first selection value) and T3 (second selection value), which is smaller than T7 (first selection value) and has a lower second corresponding volume level corresponding to player setting value M5 (second volume setting value). In addition, even if the volume control knob 140 is set to either the hall setting value T7 (first selection value) or T3 (second selection value), the volume operation means 39 adjusts the player setting value M1 (second selection value). 1 volume set value), the volume of the specific sound effect is easier to hear than the volume of the normal sound effect, and the volume adjustment knob 140 adjusts the hall set values T7 (first selected value) and T3 ( 2nd selected value), when the player set value M5 (second volume set value) is set by the volume operation means 39, the volume of the normal sound effect It is configured so that the volume of the specific sound production is hard to hear.

FIGS. 53 and 54 illustrate the third embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the second embodiment is partially modified so that the initial positions in the volume level setting table are the same among the hall setting values. there is

The volume level setting table (FIG. 53) of this embodiment differs from the volume level setting table (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment only in the initial position. That is, in the volume level setting table (FIG. 53) of this embodiment, the initial position is set to M5 corresponding to the maximum volume level for all the hall setting values T1 to T9 except silence. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the second embodiment, regardless of the player's setting value by the volume operation means 39, the maximum sound volume level (here, the maximum level is set to the volume level corresponding to the player setting value M5).

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the initial position for each hole setting value is the same, if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume level changes, but the volume adjustment notification The image PV does not change (except when the initial position is changed at the time the volume control knob 140 is operated). For example, as shown in FIGS. 54(a1), (b) to (e), when the hall setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M5 (initial position), the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. When the hall setting value is changed in the order of T3→T4→T5→T6→T7, the volume level changes sequentially as 15→19→23→27→31 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hall setting value. However, the volume adjustment notification image PV remains unchanged at PV5. However, if the player setting value has been changed to, for example, M1 at the time the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T3 to T4, not only the volume level but also the volume adjustment notification is given as shown in FIG. 54(a2)→(b). The image PV also changes.

Note that when the initial position for each hall set value is the same as in the present embodiment, the initial position does not have to be a value corresponding to the maximum sound volume level. Also, the initial positions may be the same for some hall set values (for example, hall set values T3 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the power saving mode), and the initial values for the other hall set values may be different.

FIGS. 55 and 56 illustrate a fourth embodiment of the present invention, partially modifying the second embodiment so that the maximum volume level is different for at least some hall setting values in the volume level setting table. , are the same except for the maximum volume level.

Similar to the volume level setting table (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment, the volume level setting table (FIG. 55) of the present embodiment has 10 levels of hall setting values from T0 to T9 by the volume adjustment knob 140, and volume operation. Allocation of sound volume levels corresponding to five stages of player setting values M1 to M5 by means 39 is set, hall setting values T0 for silence, T1 for presentation, T2 for factory shipment, T3 to T7 is for the normal mode, and T8 and T9 are for the power saving mode.

As for the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the sound volume level increases as the player set values increase from M1 to M5. 20, 30, 40, and 50 are the same sound volume level in any of the cases to T7, whereas the sound volume levels are different for each of the hall set values T3 to T7 with respect to the player set value M5.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum volume level is varied for each of the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. Therefore, by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, the upper limit value of the adjustable range of the volume level can be changed. It is possible to Moreover, in the case of this embodiment, since the volume levels other than the maximum volume level are common to the hall setting values T3 to T7, even if the volume control knob 140 is changed, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable when adjusting the volume. There is also

Note that in the present embodiment, the initial position differs for each of the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 55, the initial positions for the hall set values T3 to T7 are M1 to M5, respectively. is also large.

The hall set value T8 for the power saving mode is, for example, the same setting as the hall set value T3, which has the smallest upper limit value of the sound volume level among the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. Further, the hall set value T9 for the power saving mode is set to be the same as the hall set value T7, which has the largest upper limit value of the sound volume level among the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, for example. The same is true for the initial position.

Further, with respect to the hall setting value T0, the sound volume levels corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5 are all 0 (no sound). As for the hole set value T1, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum level player setting value M1 is 10, the volume level corresponding to the maximum level player setting value M5 is 50, and the other player setting values M2 to The volume level corresponding to M4 is, for example, the same as the hall set value T3. As for the hole set value T2, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum level player setting value M1 is 15, the volume level corresponding to the maximum level player setting value M5 is 55, and the other player setting values M2 to The volume level corresponding to M4 is, for example, the same as the hall set value T3. The initial positions for the hole set values T0 to T2 are all set to the minimum M1, for example.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the volume level at which the error sound is output corresponds to the hall setting value at that time, regardless of the player's setting value by the volume operation means 39, as in the second and third embodiments. is set to the maximum sound volume level (here, the sound volume level corresponding to the player setting value M5 of the maximum stage).

Further, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the initial position differs for each hole setting value. As in the embodiment, both the volume and the volume adjustment notification image PV change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 56A to 56E, when the hole setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M1 (initial position), the hole setting value is displayed while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. is changed in order of T3->T4->T5->T6->T7, the volume level changes sequentially in the order of 20->30->40->50->80 according to the initial position corresponding to the hall setting value after the change. The notification image PV also changes sequentially in the order of PV1→PV2→PV3→PV4→PV5 in accordance with the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

As described above, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (A operation means) 140, and the operation of the volume operation means (B operation means) 39 When the first Otsu value (for example, M1) is selected, the first predetermined value (for example, 20) is set, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected, and the second Otsu value is larger than the first Otsu value. A second predetermined value (eg, 30) is set when a value (eg, M2) is selected, a second predetermined value (eg, T4) is selected, and a first predetermined value (eg, M1) is selected. 3 predetermined value (e.g. 20) is set, the second A value (e.g. T4) is selected, and when the second B value (e.g. M2) is selected, the fourth predetermined value (e.g. 30) is set, The 1st predetermined value and the 3rd predetermined value are the same, the 2nd predetermined value is the same as the 4th predetermined value, the 1st A value (eg T3) is selected, and the upper limit B value (eg M5) at that time is When it is selected, the first upper limit predetermined value (for example, 60) is set, the second upper limit value (for example, T4) is selected, and when the upper limit B value at that time (for example, M5) is selected, the second Since a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 65) is set and the first upper limit value and the second upper limit value are different, the upper limit value of the volume adjustable range can be changed by operating the volume control knob 140. It is possible.

Further, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (A operation means) 140, and the first value is selected by operation of the volume operation means (B operation means) 39. When the upper limit value (for example, M5) is selected, the first upper limit predetermined value (for example, 60) is set, the first upper limit value (for example, T3) is selected, and the first upper limit value (for example, M5) is set to 1 When the first Otsu value (e.g., M4) is selected, the first predetermined value (e.g., 50) is set, the second A value (e.g., T4) is selected, and the second upper limit Otsu value (e.g., M5) is set. When selected, the second upper limit predetermined value (65) is set, the second A value (eg T4) is selected, and the second B value (eg M4 ) is selected, a second predetermined value (for example, 50) is set, the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value are the same, and the first upper predetermined value is higher than the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. is also large and smaller than the second upper limit predetermined value.

Also, as in the present embodiment, among the volume levels corresponding to the maximum player setting value (Otsu value), the minimum value corresponding to the normal mode hall setting values (specified Kou value) T3 to T7 is one step higher than the maximum. Among the volume levels corresponding to the player setting values below, it is desirable to set the maximum value corresponding to the normal mode hole setting values (specified Ko value) T3 to T7, but it is not limited to this. .

In this embodiment, although the drawings corresponding to FIGS. 51 and 52 in the second embodiment are omitted, as in the second embodiment, when the hole setting value is set to T7 (first selection value) and when the hall setting value is set to T3 (second selection value), when the player setting value is set to M1 (first volume setting value), the volume of normal sound effect The volume of the specific sound effect is large, and the volume of the specific sound effect is easier to listen to than the normal sound effect. Further, in both the case where the hole set value is set to T7 (first selection value) and the case where the hole set value is set to T3 (second selection value), the player set value is set to M5 (second selection value). 2 volume set value), the volume of the specific sound effect is smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect, and the volume of the specific sound effect is difficult to hear with respect to the normal sound effect.

FIGS. 57 and 58 illustrate a fifth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the fourth embodiment is partially modified to have the same initial position for each hall setting value in the volume level setting table. there is

The volume level setting table (FIG. 57) of this embodiment differs from the volume level setting table (FIG. 55) of the fourth embodiment only in the initial position. That is, in the sound volume level setting table (FIG. 57) of this embodiment, the initial position is set to M5 corresponding to the maximum sound volume level for all the hall setting values T1 to T9 except for silence. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the fourth embodiment, the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall setting value at that time (here, the player volume level corresponding to the set value M5).

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the initial position for each hole setting value is the same, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume Although the level changes, the volume adjustment notification image PV does not change (except when the initial position is changed when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated). For example, as shown in FIGS. 58(a1), (b) to (e), when the hall setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M5 (initial position), the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. When the hall setting value is changed in the order of T3→T4→T5→T6→T7, the volume level changes in order of 60→65→70→75→80 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hall setting value. However, the volume adjustment notification image PV remains unchanged at PV5. However, if the player setting value has been changed to, for example, M1 at the time when the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T3 to T4, not only the volume but also the volume adjustment notification image is displayed as shown in FIG. 58(a2)→(b). PV also changes.

Note that when the initial position for each hall set value is the same as in the present embodiment, the initial position does not have to be a value corresponding to the maximum sound volume level. Also, the initial positions may be the same for some hall set values (for example, hall set values T3 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the power saving mode), and the initial values for the other hall set values may be different.

FIGS. 59 to 61, 61-1, and 61-2 illustrate a sixth embodiment of the present invention, which partially modifies the second embodiment so that at least some holes in the volume level setting table are For the set values, the volume level corresponding to each player set value is common among at least some of the hall set values, but the maximum volume can be achieved by varying the range of the player set values among the hall set values. An example with different levels is shown.

The sound volume level setting table (FIG. 59) of the present embodiment corresponds to 10 levels of hall setting values from T0 to T9 by the volume control knob 140 and 10 levels of player setting values from M1 to M10 by the sound volume control means 39. However, the possible range of player setting values differs for each hall setting value. As in the second embodiment, the hall set value T0 is for silence, T1 is for presentation, T2 is for factory shipment, T3 to T7 are for normal mode, and T8 and T9 are for power saving mode.

For the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M10 are all the same. It changes by a predetermined step value (here, 9) until the sound volume level 86 corresponding to the value M10.

On the other hand, regarding the possible range of the player setting values, the upper limit is different for each of the hole setting values T3 to T7, and the lower limit is common. That is, the lower limit of the possible range of the player set values is M1 for each of the hole set values T3 to T7, whereas the upper limit of the possible range of the player set values is M6 for each of the hole set values T3 to T7. ~M10. As a result, the upper limit values of the volume level for the hall set values T3 to T7 are 50, 59, 68, 77, and 86, respectively, and the larger the hall set value, the larger the upper limit value of the volume level.

As described above, in this embodiment, the sound volume level corresponding to each player setting value is common for each of the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, and the upper limit of the range that the player setting value can take is made different. Therefore, by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, it is possible to change the upper limit of the adjustable range of the volume level, and even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is changed, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable when adjusting the volume. There is an advantage.

In this embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hole set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode are set at the upper limit of the possible range of the player set values. That is, as shown in FIG. 59, the initial positions for the hall set values T3 to T7 are M6 to M10, respectively. is also large.

The hall set value T8 for the power saving mode is, for example, the same setting as the hall set value T3, which has the smallest upper limit value of the sound volume level among the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. Further, the hall set value T9 for the power saving mode is set to be the same as the hall set value T7, which has the largest upper limit value of the sound volume level among the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, for example. The same is true for the initial position.

Further, with respect to the hole set value T0, the sound volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M10 are all 0 (no sound). As for the hall set value T1, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M10 are all the same as in the case of the hall set values T3 to T7, and the upper limit of the possible range of the player set values is, for example, the hall set value T3. is the same M6 as in the case of . Regarding the hole set value T2, the sound volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M10 are all the same as in the case of the hall set values T3 to T7, and the upper limit of the possible range of the player set values is, for example, the hall set value T4. is the same M7 as in the case of .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the volume level for outputting the error sound is set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall setting value at that time, regardless of the player's setting value by the volume control means 39 .

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since the range of player setting values differs for each hole setting value, the volume adjustment notification image PV is also different from those in the second to fifth embodiments. That is, as shown in FIG. 60, the volume adjustment notification image PV of this embodiment includes, for example, a plurality of (here, 10) volume display figures 151 to 160 corresponding to the maximum range M1 to M10 of the player setting values. there is The volume display figures 151 to 160 are formed, for example, in a vertical belt shape having a length corresponding to the player's set value, and are aligned in the left-right direction with the lower ends aligned.

The volume display figures 151 to 160 can be displayed in three different display modes, for example, "blank", "solid", and "grayout". All of the graphics 151 to 160 are displayed in one of three display modes. That is, as shown in FIG. 60, out of the volume display figures 151 to 160, the volume display figures corresponding to the outside of the player set value range (for example, in the case of the hole set value T3, the player set values M7 to M10 correspond to the player set values). volume display figures 157 to 160) are displayed in "grayed out", and among the other volume display figures, a predetermined number of display modes (for example, game In the case of the user setting value M3, the volume display figures 151 to 153) are set to be "solid", and the others (for example, volume display figures 154 to 156) are set to be "white". With such a volume adjustment notification image PV, not only the volume setting status (first information) by the player's operation, but also the range (first information) that the player's setting value can take at that time and its maximum range (third information) information). It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the sound volume display figure corresponding to the outside of the possible range of the player setting value. In the following description, the volume adjustment notification image PV is distinguished as PVαβ using a value α indicating the possible range of the player's setting value and a value β indicating the player's setting value at that time. For example, when the player setting value ranges from M1 to M6 and the player setting value is M3, the volume adjustment notification image displayed becomes the volume adjustment notification image PV63 with α=6 and β=3. The volume adjustment notification image displayed when the range of possible values is M1 to M10 and the player setting value is M10 is the volume adjustment notification image PVAA with α=A and β=A.

Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, both the volume level and the volume adjustment notification image PV change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 61A to 61E, when the hole setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M6 (initial position), the hole setting value is displayed while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. is changed in order of T3->T4->T5->T6->T7, the volume level changes sequentially in the order of 50->59->68->77->86 according to the initial position corresponding to the hall setting value after change. The notification image PV also changes in sequence from PV66→PV77→PV88→PV99→PVAA in accordance with the initial position corresponding to the changed hole set value.

As described above, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (A operation means) 140 and the operation of the volume operation means (B operation means) 39 When the first B value (eg M1) is selected, the first predetermined value (eg 5) is set, and the first B value (eg T3) is selected and is greater than the first B value. A second predetermined value (e.g. 14) is set when a value (e.g. M2) is selected, and a second predetermined value (e.g. T4) is selected and a first otsu value (e.g. M1) is selected. 3 predetermined value (e.g. 5) is set, and when the 2nd A value (e.g. T4) is selected and the 2nd B value (e.g. M2) is selected, the fourth predetermined value (e.g. 14) is set; When the second value (for example, T4) is selected and the third value (for example, M7) larger than the second value is selected, the fifth predetermined value (for example, 59) is set, and the first predetermined value is set. (e.g. 5) and the third predetermined value (e.g. 5) are the same, the second predetermined value (e.g. 14) and the fourth predetermined value (e.g. 14) are the same, and the third B value (e.g. M7) is Since it is not included in the selectable first selection range (for example, M1 to M6) when the first first value (for example, T3) is selected, the player operates the volume adjustment knob 140 on the game hall side. It is possible to change the adjustable range of the volume level by Moreover, since the upper limit value of the player setting value (value B) that can be selected by operating the volume operation means (operation means B) 39 differs between the hall setting values (specific value A) T3 to T7 in the normal mode, the volume By operating the adjustment knob 140, it is possible to change the upper limit of the adjustable range of the sound volume level.

FIG. 61-1 and FIG. 61-2 are obtained by modifying FIG. 34 in the first embodiment according to this embodiment. FIG. 61-1 shows changes in volume when the player's setting value is set to M1 to M10 by the volume operation means (first operation means) 39 when the upper limit value is set to T7, which is the maximum. FIG. 61-2 shows changes in volume when the player setting values are set to M1 to M6 when the hole setting value is set to T3, which has the lowest upper limit value of the volume level. As shown in FIG. 59, when the hall set value is set to T3, the changeable range of the volume level by the volume control means 39 is 5 (first level) to 50 (second level) (second changeable range). When the hall set value is set to T7, the changeable range of the volume level by the volume control means 39 is 5 (first level) to 86 (third level) (first changeable range). It's becoming Also, the volume corresponding to the range of volume levels 5 to 86 in FIG. 61-1 is made common to the volume corresponding to the range of volume levels 3 to 7 in FIG.

As is clear from FIGS. 61-1 and 61-2, when the player setting value is set to M2 (volume level 14) or less, the volume of the specific sound effect is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect, While the volume of the specific sound effect is easier to listen to than the normal sound effect, when the player setting value is set to M3 (volume level 23) or more, the specific sound is compared to the volume of the normal sound effect. The sound volume of the effect is small, and the volume of the specific sound effect is difficult to hear compared to the normal sound effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume level of the normal sound effect placed on the front side of the main body is set to 5 (first level), 50 (second level), which is higher than that, and 50 (second level), which is higher than that. A volume operating means (first operating means) 39 capable of changing the volume level for changing to a large 86 (third level), and a range in which the volume level can be changed by the volume operating means 39 arranged on the rear side of the main body. The changeable range switchable by the changeable range switching operation is provided with a volume adjustment knob (second operation means) 140 capable of changing the changeable range switching operation for switching the changeable range when set to the hall setting value T7 , 5 (first level), 50 (second level) and 86 (third level), and 5 (first level) and 50 ( the second changeable range including 86 (second level) and excluding 86 (third level), and when the volume level of the normal sound effect is set to 5 (first level), the volume of the normal sound effect On the other hand, the volume of the specific sound effect is easy to listen to, and when the volume level of the normal sound effect is set to 50 (second level) or 86 (third level), the specific sound is reduced to the volume of the normal sound effect. The sound volume of the performance is configured to be difficult to hear.

FIGS. 62 and 63 illustrate the seventh embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the sixth embodiment is partially changed to have the same initial position for each hall setting value in the volume level setting table. there is

The volume level setting table (FIG. 62) of this embodiment differs from the volume level setting table (FIG. 59) of the sixth embodiment only in the initial position. That is, in the sound volume level setting table (FIG. 62) of this embodiment, any of the player setting values M1 to M10 that can be selected for all hall setting values (here, M1 to M6), For example, M6, which is the maximum value, is set as the initial position. As described above, in the present embodiment, although the upper limit value of the volume level differs for each hall setting value, the volume level corresponding to the initial position is the same for all hall setting values except silence.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the initial position for each hole setting value is the same, if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV changes. The volume level does not change (except when the initial position has been changed at the time the volume control knob 140 is operated). For example, as shown in FIGS. 63(a1), (b) to (e1), when the hall setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M6 (initial position), the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. When the hall setting value is changed in the order of T3→T4→T5→T6→T7, the volume adjustment notification image PV changes in order of PV66→PV76→PV86→PV96→PVA6, but the volume level corresponds to each setting position. 50 remains unchanged. However, if the player setting value has been changed to, for example, M1 when the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T3 to T4, not only the volume adjustment notification image PV but also the The volume level also changes.

Similarly, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63(e1), (d) to (a1), when the hole setting value is set to T7 and the player setting value is set to M6 (initial position), the volume adjustment notification image PV When the hall setting value is changed in the order of T7→T6→T5→T4→T3 during the display of , the volume adjustment notification image PV changes in order of PVA6→PV96→PV86→PV76→PV66, but the volume level changes according to each setting. It remains 50 corresponding to the position. However, if the player setting value has been changed to, for example, M10 when the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T7 to T6, not only the volume adjustment notification image PV but also the volume adjustment notification image PV as shown in FIG. The volume level also changes.

FIG. 64 illustrates the eighth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the portion corresponding to the normal mode in the volume level setting table (FIG. 59) according to the sixth embodiment is expanded to the entire volume level setting table. there is

As shown in FIG. 64, the sound volume level setting table of this embodiment has 10 levels of hall setting values T0 to T9 and 10 levels of player setting values from M1 to M10. are all for normal mode. Further, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M10 are the same for all the hall set values T0 to T9. It changes by a predetermined step value (here, 9) up to the corresponding sound volume level 86 .

On the other hand, regarding the possible range of the player setting values, the upper limit is different for each of the hole setting values T0 to T9, and the lower limit is common. That is, the lower limit of the possible range of the player setting values is M1 for all of the hole setting values T0 to T9, whereas the upper limit of the possible range of the player setting values is M1 for each of the hole setting values T0 to T9. ~M10. As a result, the range of the corresponding player set values is widened by one step toward the upper limit from the hall set values T0 to T9, and the corresponding upper limit of the sound volume level is also increased by a predetermined step value (here, 9). there is

Further, in the sound volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hall setting values T0 to T9 are set to the upper limit of the possible range of the player setting values. That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the initial positions for the hall set values T0 to T9 are M1 to M10, respectively. is also large.

Also, the volume level at which the error sound is output is set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall setting value at that time, regardless of the player's setting value by the volume operation means 39 .

Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume level and the volume adjustment notification image PV and change together.

FIG. 65 illustrates the ninth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the initial positions in the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment are common to all hall setting values.

In the sound volume level setting table (FIG. 65) of this embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hall set values T0 to T9 are all common and set to M1, which is the lower limit of the range that the player set values can take. As for the volume level at which the error sound is output, the hole setting at that time is irrespective of the player's setting value by the volume operation means 39, as in the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment. Set to the maximum volume level that corresponds to the value.

Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV changes as in the case of the seventh embodiment (FIG. 63). However, the volume level does not change (except when the initial position is changed when the volume control knob 140 is operated).

66 and 67 illustrate the tenth embodiment of the present invention, in which the initial positions in the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 64 and 65) according to the eighth and ninth embodiments are set to one or a plurality of halls. An example of common values for each hole set value group composed of values is shown.

In the volume level setting table (FIGS. 66 and 67) of the present embodiment, a plurality of hole setting value groups each composed of one or more consecutive hole setting values are formed, and the initial position is set for each of these hole setting value groups. The initial position is, for example, the smallest value among the upper limit values of the player setting values in each hole setting value group. For example, in the case of the sound volume level setting table shown in FIG. 66, three hole setting value groups T0 to T2, T3 to T5, and T6 to T9 are formed, and the initial positions of each of these hole setting value groups are, for example, M1, M4, It is set to M7. Similarly, in the case of the sound volume level setting table shown in FIG. 67, three hole setting value groups T0 to T4, T5 to T8, and T9 are formed, and the initial positions for each of these hole setting value groups are, for example, M1, M6, It is set to M10.

Further, regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 64 and 65) according to the eighth and ninth embodiments, regardless of the value set by the player by the volume operation means 39, , is set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the current hall setting.

It should be noted that the setting of the initial position as in this embodiment can be applied to all the embodiments described above or later.

FIG. 68 exemplifies the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the power saving mode and silent mode are added to the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68, the volume level setting table of this embodiment has 16 levels of hall set values T0 to TF, and 10 levels of player set values M1 to M10. is for normal mode, TA to TE are for power saving mode, and TF is for silent mode. The settings for the normal mode are common to the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment.

The hall set value TA for the power saving mode (low) is, for example, set to be the same as the hall set value T0, which has the smallest upper limit value of the volume level among the hall set values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. Further, the hall set value TB for the power saving mode (middle) is, for example, set to be the same as the hall set value T5 whose upper limit value of the volume level is substantially intermediate among the hall set values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. . Further, the hall set value TC for the power saving mode (high) is set to be the same as the hall set value T9, which has the largest volume level upper limit among the hall set values T0 to T9 for the normal mode, for example.

Further, in the sound volume level setting table of the present embodiment, a hall set value TD for power saving mode (middle) and a hall set value TE for power saving mode (high) are provided separately from hall set values TB and TC. The setting of the hole set values TD and TE differ from the hole set values TB and TC only in the initial positions, and the initial positions corresponding to the hole set values TB and TC are set at the upper limit of the possible range of the player set values. On the other hand, the initial positions corresponding to the hole set values TD and TE are set at the lower limit of the possible range of the player set values.

In this manner, a plurality of hole setting values having a common range of player setting values may be provided, and the initial position may be different for each hole setting value.

FIG. 69 illustrates the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the power saving mode and silent mode are added to the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 69, the sound volume level setting table of this embodiment has 16 levels of hall setting values T0 to TF, and 10 levels of player setting values from M1 to M10. is for normal mode, TA to TE are for power saving mode, and TF is for silent mode. The settings for the normal mode are common to the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 64 and 68) according to the eighth and eleventh embodiments.

The hall set value TA for the power saving mode (low) is, for example, set to be the same as the hall set value T0, which has the smallest upper limit value of the volume level among the hall set values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. The hall set value TE for the power saving mode (MAX) is, for example, set to be the same as the hall set value T9, which has the highest volume level upper limit among the hall set values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. Furthermore, for the hall set values TB, TC, and TD for the power saving mode (medium), (large), and (extremely large), three hall set values T2 and T5 selected at approximately equal intervals from the hall set values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. , and T7.

FIG. 70 illustrates the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the initial position in the volume level setting table (FIG. 69) according to the twelfth embodiment is common to all hall setting values.

In the sound volume level setting table (FIG. 70) of the present embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hole setting values T0 to T9 are all common and set to M1, which is the lower limit of the possible range of the player setting values. As for the volume level at which the error sound is output, as in the volume level setting table (FIG. 69) according to the twelfth embodiment, regardless of the player's setting value by the volume operation means 39, the hole setting at that time Set to the maximum volume level that corresponds to the value.

FIG. 71 illustrates the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which a volume level setting table for error sound is separately provided by partially changing the second embodiment. In the above-described second to thirteenth embodiments, the maximum sound volume level for each hole setting value is used for outputting the error sound (and the specific notification sound), but in this embodiment, the sound volume for the normal game sound A volume level setting table for error sound is provided separately from the level setting table. In the following description, the volume level of normal game sounds other than error sounds (and specific notification sounds) will be referred to as "normal volume level", and the volume level of error sounds (and specific notification sounds) will be referred to as "error volume level".

FIG. 71(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment except for settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 71(b) is a first example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 71(a). In the example of FIG. 71(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all the hall setting values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 31) is set to a value that does not exceed For example, since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T3 is 15, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T3 is set to 18, which is higher than that, and corresponds to the hall set value T7. Since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level is 31, which is the maximum sound volume level, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T7 is set to 31, which is the same as the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 71(c) is a second example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 71(a). In the example of FIG. 71(c), similar to FIG. 71(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all hall set values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall set value in FIG. 71(a). is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (here, 31), but the error volume level fluctuation width (here, 6), excluding the case of silence, is the player setting value 1 in the case of the normal volume level. It is smaller (or even smaller) than, for example, the maximum value (here, 7) of the volume level differences for the steps. In addition, the fluctuation width of the error sound volume level except for the case of silence is smaller than the minimum value (here, 3) of the sound volume level difference for one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal sound volume level (or less). You may

FIG. 71(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 71(a). In the example of FIG. 71(d), the hall set values T3 to T7 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into upper and lower groups, and the error sound volume level corresponding to the lower hall set values T3 and T4 is the upper limit of the normal sound volume level. , and the error sound volume level corresponding to the upper hole setting values T5 to T7 is set to the maximum sound volume level. In the example of FIG. 71(d), the error sound volume levels corresponding to the hall set values (excluding silence) T1, T2, T8, and T9 other than the normal mode are all set to the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 71(e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d) may be used as the error sound volume level setting table in this case. It may be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 71(e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

The volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 71(b) to (e) are also applicable to the volume level setting table (FIG. 53) according to the third embodiment.

FIG. 72 illustrates the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which a volume level setting table for error sound is separately provided by partially changing the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 72(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, which is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 55) of the fourth embodiment except for settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 72(b) is a first example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 72(a). In the example of FIG. 72(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all the hall setting values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 80) is set to a value that does not exceed For example, since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T3 is 60, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T3 is set to 72, which is higher than that, and corresponds to the hall set value T7. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 80, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hall set value T7 is set to 80, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 72(c) is a second example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 72(a). In the example of FIG. 72(c), as in FIG. 72(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all hall set values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall set value in FIG. 72(a). is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (here, 80), but the variation width of the error volume level (here, 8), excluding the case of silence, is the player setting value 1 in the case of the normal volume level. It is smaller (or less) than, for example, the minimum value (here, 10) of the volume level differences for the steps. Note that the fluctuation range of the error volume level, excluding the case of silence, is smaller than the maximum value (here, 20) of the volume level differences corresponding to one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal volume level (or less). You may

FIG. 72(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 72(a). In the example of FIG. 72(d), the hall set values T3 to T7 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into upper and lower groups, and the error sound volume level corresponding to the lower hall set values T3 and T4 is the upper limit of the normal sound volume level. , and the error sound volume level corresponding to the upper hole setting values T5 to T7 is set to the maximum sound volume level. In the example of FIG. 72(d), the error sound volume levels corresponding to the hall setting values (excluding silence) T1, T2, T8 and T9 other than the normal mode are all set to the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 72(e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 72(b) to 72(d) may be used as the error sound volume level setting table in this case. It can be a level. In the volume level setting table for specific notification sounds shown in FIG. 72(e), all specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

The volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 72(b) to (e) are also applicable to the volume level setting table (FIG. 57) according to the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 73 illustrates the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which a volume level setting table for error sound is separately provided by partially changing the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 73(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, which is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 59) of the sixth embodiment except for settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 73(b) is a first example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 73(a). In the example of FIG. 73(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all hall set values are equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal sound volume level for each hall set value in FIG. 86) is set to a value that does not exceed For example, since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T3 is 50, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T3 is set to 59, which is higher than that, and corresponds to the hall set value T7. Since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level is 86, which is the maximum sound volume level, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T7 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 73(c) is a second example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 73(a). In the example of FIG. 73(c), as in FIG. 73(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all hall set values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall set value in FIG. 73(a). is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (here, 86), but the variation width of the error volume level (here, 6), excluding the case of silence, is the player setting value 1 in the case of the normal volume level. It is smaller (or less) than the sound volume level difference (here, 9) corresponding to the steps.

FIG. 73(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 73(a). In the example of FIG. 73(d), the hall set values T3 to T7 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into upper and lower groups, and the error sound volume level corresponding to the lower hall set values T3 and T4 is the upper limit of the normal sound volume level. , and the error sound volume level corresponding to the upper hole setting values T5 to T7 is set to the maximum sound volume level. In the example of FIG. 73(d), the error sound volume levels corresponding to the hall setting values (excluding silence) T1, T2, T8, and T9 other than the normal mode are all set to the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 73(e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 73(b) to 73(d) may be used as the volume level setting table for the error sound in this case. It can be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 73(e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

The volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 73(b) to (e) are also applicable to the volume level setting table (FIG. 62) according to the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 74 illustrates the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which a volume level setting table for error sound is separately provided by partially changing the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 74(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, which is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) of the eighth embodiment except for settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 74(b) is a first example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 74(a). In the example of FIG. 74(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all the hall setting values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 86) is set to a value that does not exceed For example, since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T0 is 5, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T0 is set to 14, which is higher than that, and corresponds to the hall set value T9. Since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level is 86, which is the maximum sound volume level, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T9 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 74(c) is a second example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 74(a). In the example of FIG. 74(c), as in FIG. 74(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all hall set values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall set value in FIG. 74(a). is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (here, 86), but the variation width of the error volume level (here, 9) is one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal volume level. The difference (here, 9) or less. It should be noted that the fluctuation range of the error sound volume level may be smaller than the sound volume level difference corresponding to one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal sound volume level.

FIG. 74(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 74(a). In the example of FIG. 74(d), the hall set values T0 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into upper and lower groups, and the error sound volume level corresponding to the lower hall set values T0 to T2 is the upper limit of the normal sound volume level. and the error sound volume level corresponding to the upper hole set values T3 to T9 is set to the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 74(e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 74(b) to 74(d) may be used as the volume level setting table for the error sound in this case. It can be a level. In the volume level setting table for specific notification sounds shown in FIG. 74(e), all specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level.

The volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 74(b) to (e) are similarly applicable to the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 65 to 67) according to the ninth and tenth embodiments. .

FIG. 75 illustrates the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which a volume level setting table for error sound is separately provided by partially changing the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 75(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 68) of the eleventh embodiment except for settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 75(b) is a first example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 75(a). In the example of FIG. 75(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all the hall setting values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 86) is set to a value that does not exceed For example, since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T0 is 5, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T0 is set to 14, which is higher than that, and corresponds to the hall set value T9. Since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level is 86, which is the maximum sound volume level, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T9 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 75(c) is a second example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 75(a). In the example of FIG. 75(c), similar to FIG. 75(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all hall set values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall set value in FIG. 75(a). is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (here, 86), but the fluctuation width of the error volume level (here, 9) excluding the case of silence is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level The volume level difference for the steps (here, 9) or less. It should be noted that the fluctuation width of the error sound volume level excluding the case of no sound may be smaller than the sound volume level difference of one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal sound volume level.

FIG. 75(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 75(a). In the example of FIG. 75(d), the hall set values T0 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the hall set values TA to TE corresponding to the power saving mode are divided into two upper and lower groups, respectively, and the lower hall set values correspond to The error sound volume level is set to the upper limit of the normal sound volume level, and the error sound volume level corresponding to the upper hall set value is set to the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 75(e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 75(b) to 75(d) may be used as the volume level setting table for the error sound in this case. It can be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 75(e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

FIG. 76 illustrates the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which a volume level setting table for error sound is separately provided by partially changing the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 76(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, which is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 69) of the twelfth embodiment except for settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 76(b) is a first example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 76(a). In the example of FIG. 76(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all the hall setting values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 86) is set to a value that does not exceed For example, since the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T0 is 5, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall set value T0 is set to 14, which is higher than that, and corresponds to the hall set value T9. Since the upper limit of the normal sound volume level is 86, which is the maximum sound volume level, the error sound volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T9 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 76(c) is a second example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 76(a). In the example of FIG. 76(c), as in FIG. 76(b), the error sound volume levels corresponding to all hall set values are equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the normal sound volume level for each hall set value in FIG. 76(a). is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (here, 86), but the variation width of the error volume level (here, 9), excluding the case of silence, is the player setting value 1 in the case of the normal volume level. The volume level difference for the steps (here, 9) or less. Note that the fluctuation width of the error sound volume level excluding the case of no sound may be smaller than the sound volume level difference of one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal sound volume level.

FIG. 76(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 76(a). In the example of FIG. 76(d), the hall set values T0 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the hall set values TA to TE corresponding to the power saving mode are divided into two upper and lower groups, respectively, and the lower hall set values correspond to The error sound volume level is set to the upper limit of the normal sound volume level, and the error sound volume level corresponding to the upper hall set value is set to the maximum sound volume level.

FIG. 76(e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 76(b) to 76(d) may be used as the error sound volume level setting table in this case. It may be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 76(e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

The volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 76(b) to 76(e) are similarly applicable to the volume level setting table (FIG. 70) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

FIGS. 77-79 illustrate the twentieth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the content of the jackpot determination process (FIGS. 20-23) of the first embodiment is changed.

In the jackpot determination process of the first embodiment, in one jackpot determination table, the lower limit of the jackpot determination value, the upper limit of the jackpot determination value at low probability, the upper limit of the jackpot determination value at high probability, the small hit determination The lower limit value of the value, the upper limit value of the small hit determination value, and the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number are defined respectively. Each range of judgment values is defined by an individual judgment table.

That is, in the big-hit determination process of this embodiment, a low-probability big-hit determination table, a high-probability big-hit determination table, and a small-hit determination table shown in FIG. 78 are used. Each determination table is composed of lower limit value information for defining the lower limit of each determination value and upper limit value information for defining the upper limit. It should be noted that each range of the low-probability big-hit determination value, the high-probability big-hit determination value, and the small-hit determination value in the present embodiment is exactly the same as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22).

The low-probability jackpot judgment table defines the range of the jackpot judgment value at the time of low-probability. The upper limit of the judgment value is set respectively. In addition, the range of the low-probability jackpot determination value is different for each setting value (settings 1 to 6), but in this embodiment the lower limit value is constant regardless of the setting value, and the upper limit value is different for each setting value. there is Therefore, in the low-probability jackpot determination table, only the upper limit value information among the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information is composed of six types of values corresponding to the settings 1-6.

The high probability jackpot judgment table defines the range of the jackpot judgment value at the time of high probability, the lower limit value of the high probability jackpot judgment value -1 in the lower limit value information, and the high probability jackpot The upper limit of the judgment value is set respectively. Also, the range of the high-probability jackpot determination value differs for each setting value (settings 1 to 6), but in this embodiment the lower limit value is constant regardless of the setting value, and the upper limit value is different for each setting value. there is Therefore, in the high-probability jackpot determination table, only the upper limit value information among the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information is composed of six types of values corresponding to settings 1-6.

In this embodiment, the lower limit of the low-probability jackpot determination value and the high-probability jackpot determination value are the same value (10000) (FIG. 22). It is specified separately from the big hit determination table.

The small hit determination table defines the range of the small hit determination value, the lower limit value -1 of the small hit determination value is set in the lower limit value information, and the upper limit of the small hit determination value is set in the upper limit value information. ing. Since the range of the small hit determination value is common to all setting values (settings 1 to 6), both the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information are configured with one value in the small hit determination table.

Next, the processing procedure of the big hit determination processing shown in FIG. 77 will be described. In the big hit determination process (FIG. 77), first, a big hit determination random number is obtained (S161). Also, the address of the jackpot determination table corresponding to the probability state at that time (low probability/high probability) is acquired (S162), and the lower limit value information is acquired from that address (S163). For example, if it is in low probability, the address of the low probability big hit determination table is acquired, and the lower limit value -1 of the low probability big hit determination value is acquired as the lower limit value information.

Next, the lower limit value information is compared with the big hit determination random number value acquired in S161 (S164). Then, if the jackpot determination random number value is greater than the lower limit value information (S165: Yes), there is a possibility that the jackpot determination random number value is within the range of the jackpot determination value. The processing after S166 regarding the comparison of is executed. That is, the setting value data (any of 0 to 5) is acquired (S166), the setting value data is offset and the address is changed (S167), and the upper limit value information from the address, that is, when the accuracy is low or The upper limit value of the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability is acquired (S168).

In the case of the low-probability/high-probability big hit determination table shown in FIG. 78, the upper limit value information is provided with 6 types corresponding to the settings 1 to 6, so the set value data acquired in S166 (0 to 5) is offset, for example, if the setting is 1, the first upper limit information is obtained with offset=0, and if the setting is 6, the sixth upper limit information is obtained with offset=5 (S167, S168).

When the upper limit information is acquired in S168, the value of the upper limit information is compared with the big hit determination random number value acquired in S161 (S169). And, if the jackpot determination random number value is below the upper limit information (the upper limit value of the jackpot determination value at low probability or high probability) (S170: Yes), the jackpot determination random value is within the range of the jackpot determination value. is determined, the jackpot determination result becomes a low-probability jackpot or a high-probability jackpot (FIG. 22). For example, if the jackpot determination result is a low-probability jackpot, 5AH is set to the low-probability jackpot flag and the high-probability jackpot flag, and if the jackpot determination result is a high-probability jackpot, only the high-probability jackpot flag 5AH is set.

When it is determined at S165 that the big hit determination random number value is equal to or less than the lower limit information (S165: No), and when it is determined at S170 that the big hit determination random number value is greater than the upper limit information (S170: No) Since it is determined that the big hit determination random number value is not within the range of the big hit determination value, the processing after S172 regarding the small hit determination is executed. That is, first, the address of the small hit determination table is obtained (S172), and the lower limit value information (lower limit of the small hit determination value -1) is obtained from the address (S173).

Next, the lower limit value information is compared with the big hit determination random value acquired in S161 (S174). Then, if the big hit determination random number value is equal to or less than the lower limit value information (S175: No), it is determined that the big hit determination random number value is not within the range of either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value, so the big hit determination result It becomes a miss, and the big hit determination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the big hit determination random number is greater than the lower limit information (S175: Yes), there is a possibility that the big hit determination random number is within the range of the small hit determination value, so the upper limit information ( The upper limit of the small hit determination value) is acquired (S176), and the value of the upper limit information is compared with the big hit determination random number value acquired in S161 (S177).

Then, if the big hit determination random number is equal to or less than the upper limit information (the upper limit of the small hit determination value) (S178: Yes), it is determined that the big hit determination random number is within the range of the small hit determination value. The judgment result becomes a small hit (FIG. 22), for example, the small hit judgment flag is set to 5AH to end the big hit judgment process, but the big hit judgment random number is greater than the upper limit information (the upper limit of the small hit judgment value). If so (S178: No), since it is determined that the big hit determination random number is not within the range of either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value, the big hit determination result is a loss, and the big hit determination process is terminated as it is. .

By the way, the jackpot determination process (Fig. 77) of this embodiment is similar to the jackpot determination process (Fig. 20) of the first embodiment, and the pachinko machine that does not have a setting change function (that is, has only one set value) is also available. That is, in the present embodiment, a program for judging a big hit is used for a model that can change setting values in multiple stages (there are multiple stages of setting values) and a model that does not have a setting change function (the setting value is in one stage). can be made common.

When executing the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 77 with a model that does not have the setting change function, the big-hit determination table is constructed as shown in FIG. The difference between the low/high probability big hit determination table (for setting 1 stage) shown in FIG. 79 and the low/high probability big hit determination table (for setting 6 stages) shown in FIG. Of the 6 types of upper limit information corresponding to , set the upper limit value of the low/high probability jackpot judgment value to the upper limit information for setting 1, and set the upper limit value for other settings 2 to 6 The only difference is that dummy data is set in (shaded portion in FIG. 79).

In the big hit determination process (FIG. 77) of this embodiment, the set value data (any of 0 to 5) is acquired (S166), and after changing the address by using the set value data as an offset (S167), the address (S168), but in the case of a pachinko machine with only one set value, 0 is set in the set value data, so in S168 offset = 0 and the first Since the upper limit value information is acquired, it is possible to normally execute the jackpot determination process.

Also, in the jackpot determination table (for setting 1 stage) shown in FIG. 79, dummy data is set in the upper limit information for settings 2 to 6, so the data size is set to the jackpot determination table (setting 6 for stages).

In the above embodiment, the sound effects emitted from the game machine include the first sound effect output from the speaker based on the sound data and the second sound effect output along with the driving of the driving means. A volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the first sound effect to a first volume value or a second volume value having an output volume larger than the first volume value, wherein the output volume is set to the first volume value. , an output volume emitted from the game machine when only the first sound effect is executed, and an output emitted from the game machine when only the first sound effect is executed with the second volume value set. an output volume emitted from the gaming machine when the first sound effect and the second sound effect are executed in a state in which the volume difference from the volume is set to the first volume difference and the first sound effect is set; When the volume difference between the output volume emitted from the game machine when the first sound effect and the second sound effect are executed in the state set to the second volume value is the second volume difference, The second volume difference is configured to be smaller than the first volume difference.

In addition, as the sound effects emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the sound data and a second sound effect output along with the driving of the driving means. a first volume change means capable of changing the output volume of the first sound effect to a first volume value or a second volume value having an output volume larger than the first volume value; and when a predetermined condition is satisfied , a second volume change means for changing the output volume of the first sound effect to the second volume value regardless of the player's operation, wherein the first volume value is different from the output volume of the first sound effect and the output volume of the second sound effect is easy to hear, and the output volume of the second sound effect is difficult to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect at the second volume value. It is configured.

In addition, in the gaming machine, the display means capable of displaying the symbol variation game and the special game state advantageous to the player from the normal game state when the result of the symbol variation game becomes a specific mode,
As the sound effects emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the sound data and a second sound effect output along with the driving of the drive means. A sound volume changing means capable of changing the output sound volume of the one-sound effect to any one of a plurality of types, and the special game state and the normal game state have different output sound volumes emitted from the gaming machine, In both the normal game state and the special game state, when the output volume is changed to the minimum by the volume changing means, the output volume of the second sound effect is audible with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect. When the output sound volume is changed to the maximum by the sound volume changing means, the output sound volume of the second sound effect is difficult to hear with respect to the output sound volume of the first sound effect. ing.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable game of symbols becomes a specific mode, the second output from the speaker based on the audio data is provided as the audio effect emitted from the gaming machine. There are one sound effect and a second sound effect that is output as the driving means is driven, and a sound volume changing means capable of changing the output sound volume of the first sound effect to a plurality of set sound volumes by the player's operation. and, as a production for executing both the first sound production and the second sound production, the output volume of the first sound production is relatively low with respect to the output volume of the second sound production. When there are a specific effect and a second specific effect in which the output volume of the first sound effect is relatively high with respect to the output volume of the second sound effect, and the pattern suggests the possibility of the specific mode. , the first specific effect is executed, and the second specific effect is executed when notifying that the symbol will be in the specific mode, and the first specific effect is the second specific effect in any of the second specific effects, When the output volume is changed to the minimum by the volume changing means, the output volume of the second sound effect is easily audible with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect, and the output volume is maximized by the volume changing means. When the volume is changed, the output volume of the second sound effect is difficult to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect.

In addition, as the sound effects emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the sound data and a second sound effect output along with the driving of the driving means. The output volume of the first sound effect is changed by the player's operation to a first volume value or a second volume value larger than the first volume value or an output volume larger than the second volume value. volume change means capable of changing to a third volume value; volume change range switching means arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine and capable of switching the change range of the output volume by the volume change means; and the volume change range switching means , a first volume change range including the first volume value, the second volume value and the third volume value, and a second volume change range including the first volume value and the second volume value but not including the third volume value and a sound change range, wherein at the first volume value, the output volume of the second sound effect is easy to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect, and the second volume value or the third volume The value is configured such that the output volume of the second sound effect is difficult to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect.

In addition, as the sound effects emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the sound data and a second sound effect output along with the driving of the driving means. a volume changing means disposed and capable of changing the output volume of the first sound effect to a first volume value or a second volume value larger than the first volume value by a player's operation; output volume selection means arranged on the rear side and capable of selecting an output volume of the first volume value and the second volume value; The first selection value or the second selection value includes the first selection value and a second selection value in which the output volume of the second volume value is set to be small among the output volumes of the second volume value. At the first volume value, the output volume of the second sound effect is easier to hear than the output volume of the first sound effect, and at the second volume value at the first selection value or the second selection value , the output volume of the second sound effect is difficult to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect.

Further, as the sound effect emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the sound data and a second sound effect output along with the driving of the driving means, and the first sound effect and a second volume change means capable of changing the output volume of the second sound effect, wherein the first volume change means is during execution of the first sound effect While the output sound volume can be changed regardless of whether the second sound effect is being executed, the second sound volume change means is configured to change the output sound volume.

Further, a display means capable of displaying a symbol variation game, a voice means capable of outputting voice, a display effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined display effect by the display means, and a predetermined display effect by the sound means. a sound effect execution means capable of executing a sound effect, wherein the display effect is composed of a series of moving images connecting a plurality of scenes, and the sound effect includes a first sound effect and a second sound effect. and during execution of the display effect, the sound effect executing means executes the second sound effect after the execution of the first sound effect, and after a silence period, the display effect executing means performs the sound The means is configured to change the scene of the display effect at the timing of executing the second sound effect.

In addition, in the gaming machine, in which a display means capable of displaying a symbol variation game and a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the symbol variation game becomes a specific aspect, the specific aspect is displayed during the symbol variation. A specific advance notice capable of suggesting the possibility that the There is a second half section that suggests the possibility of the specific mode, and audio output means capable of outputting a sound related to the specific announcement when the specific announcement is executed, wherein the audio output means outputs the first half section. When the section is executed, the sound related to the specific notice is output at a first volume, and when the second half section is executed, the sound related to the specific notice is output at a second volume higher than the first volume. It is configured.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, in the example of FIG. 33, the generation timing and generation period of the vibration sound are the same as those of the "collision change sound", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the vibration sound may be generated before the "color change", for example, at the time of "collision", or may be generated at the same timing as the "color change". Also, the vibrating sound may be generated at the "arrow appearance" time, or at both the "arrow appearance" time and the "collision" and/or "color change" time. If the vibration sound is generated both at the time of "arrow appearance" and at the time of "collision" and/or "color change", the vibration sound at the time of "arrow appearance" is longer than that at the time of "collision" and/or "color change". You may make each vibration pattern different, such as shortening (or lengthening).

Appearing sounds may also vary in type and/or output volume depending on the changing color of the hold (the expected degree of confidence to be derived). In addition, when providing a plurality of types of appearing sound and/or output volume in this way, the ease of holding change (whether or not a predetermined degree of reliability is derived, that is, the production degree of success) may be varied. As a result, depending on the sound that appears at the time of appearance, the subsequent result can be expected, and it can be used as a mechanism for further depriving the player of the player's line of sight.

In addition, when the output volume of the appearing sound is varied, the balance of the output volumes of the appearing sound, the fanning sound, and the collision-changing sound is set so as to have the relationship shown in the explanation of FIG. It is desirable to set However, not limited to this, for example, when the reliability is relatively low (when the content of the derivation result is relatively low, when a failure pattern that is not derived is selected, etc.), by lowering the output volume, the above-mentioned (For example, the volume of the appearing sound is lower than that of the provoking sound). (for example, when a successful pattern is selected), the configuration may be such that the output volume is balanced as described above. In that case, for example, (volume of appearing sound) > (volume of collision change sound or fanning sound) may be set. Since the content can also be varied, in addition to increasing interest in the advance notice effect, it is possible for the player to select a trigger for switching the line of sight at a more detailed timing. In other words, for a known player, it is possible to switch the line of sight in the failure pattern as little as possible and to switch the line of sight in the success pattern. Moreover, these are applicable not only to collision sounds, but also to roaring sounds and collision-changing sounds. In that case, it may be applied to all these sounds in the same way, or may be applied to any one or a plurality of sounds.

In this way, the volume relationship of the appearing sound, the fanning sound, and the collision-changing sound is not limited to (volume of collision-changing sound)>(volume of appearing sound)>(volume of fanning sound) shown in FIG. , by making the volume of the appearing sound (first volume) larger than the volume of the collision-changing sound (second volume), for example, (volume of appearing sound)>(volume of swaying sound)>(volume of collision-changing sound) Alternatively, (volume of collision-changing sound)>(volume of rumble sound)>(volume of appearing sound).

In the example of FIG. 33, an arrow image is displayed when an appearing sound is generated, but it is not necessary to completely match the sound output timing and the image display. Instead, the image of the arrow may be displayed after the appearance sound is generated, or the image of the arrow may be displayed when the rumble sound is generated. By making the sound precede the image in this way, after the player's line of sight is first switched to the liquid crystal screen by the sound, the state of the image change corresponding to the sound can be shown to the player. It is possible to further attract the interest of the player who has changed his/her line of sight.

Also, the BGM output volume may be reduced during at least a partial period of the hold change effect. As a result, it is possible to make the volume-increasing effects such as appearing sounds, fanning sounds, collision-changing sounds, and the like, and vibrating sounds more conspicuous, thereby making it easier to attract the player's attention. In this case, the reduction rate of the BGM output volume may be different between the first half section and the second half section of the presentation. For example, the rate of decrease in the BGM output volume may be smaller (the BGM output volume may be increased) in the latter half period than in the first half period, or vice versa. Also, when increasing the rate of decrease in the output sound volume of BGM, the sound may be muted.

In the example of FIG. 33, the cut split of the image effect is not changed during the suspension change effect, but the cut split may be changed in the middle. By changing the cut division according to the scene, the feature of each scene can be maximized, and the player who has moved his eyes can concentrate on the performance without getting bored. In this case, the cut split can be changed any number of times. For example, the cut split can be changed in each scene of the arrow appearing, approaching, and colliding. It may be cut and split.

Also, the time distribution of each scene shown in FIG. 33 is arbitrary, and for example, the times of the arrow appearance scene, the approach scene, and the collision scene may be different. In this case, it is desirable to set the time as (approach scene time)>(collision scene time)>(arrow appearance scene time). As a result, it is possible to set a sufficient amount of time from when the player's attention is captured until the result appears, and the player organizes the information in his/her head from when the player's attention is captured until the result is derived. You can set a time for Alternatively, (approaching scene time)>(arrow appearing scene time)>(arrow colliding scene time) may be satisfied, and the same effect can be achieved in this case as well. Alternatively, (time of arrow appearing scene)>(time of approaching scene)>(time of arrow collision scene). In this case, a sufficient amount of time can be set until the arrow appearance scene transitions to the approach scene (at the time of the arrow), so the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Also, a predetermined effect image may be provided for the image of the arrow (the image that prompts the change to hold), that is, the image that is the target of the sound that appears. At that time, the effect image may be changed for each scene, that is, at the time of appearance (appearance timing), at the time of swaying (during swaying), and at the time of collision change (collision timing or after collision). Further, the effect image may be configured on a different layer with image data different from that of the arrow image, or may be configured as one image of the arrow and the effect. Also, the images from the appearance of the arrow to the collision or after the collision may be configured as a series of moving images. In contrast to the success pattern shown in FIG. 33, the failure pattern (pending change failure pattern) is a series of moving images from the appearance until the arrow fades out to the edge of the screen without colliding with a fan. It may be configured as In addition, the display mode of the arrow image and the effect image up to a predetermined point before the collision may be substantially the same or may be different depending on whether it is successful or unsuccessful. In addition, depending on the type of image up to a predetermined time point before the collision, a case where the pattern is likely to be a success pattern and a case where the pattern is likely to be a failure pattern may be provided.

The speed at which the arrow image (the image prompting the pending change) is moved may be varied between appearance and collision. In this case, the movement speed at the time of appearance (when the sound is generated) is slower than when it appears (when the sound is generated), such as when it appears (when the sound is generated) and when it is excited (when the sound is generated). You may change the movement speed by . Of course, the movement speed may be faster at the time of fanning (when the fanning sound is generated) than at the time of appearance (when the appearing sound is generated). In addition, the movement speed during collision (when a collision sound is generated) is faster than that during agitation (when a collision sound is generated). Different speeds are possible. Of course, the moving speed at the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated) may be slower than that when it is being stirred (when the collision sound is generated). In addition, movement speed at the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated) is slower than when it appears (when the sound is generated). Different speeds are possible. Of course, the moving speed at the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated) may be faster than when it appears (when the sound is generated). In addition, regarding the movement speed when moving the arrow image (image that prompts the change of hold), time).

When the image of the arrow appears at the same time as or after the output of the appearing sound, the dynamic display can increase the attention of the player to the effect and the notice after the player's eye is caught. . Similarly, when the collision change sound is generated, i.e., at the timing of the hold change (reliability disclosure), the changed hold image (image indicating the reliability) is displayed at the same time as or after the collision change sound is generated. It is desirable to Further, it is desirable to dynamically display the arrow image (the image prompting the change of hold), but it may be statically displayed.

In the example of FIG. 33, the screen is toned down (visibility suppression) in the period from the start of the production (arrow appearance scene) to the approaching scene, but the end of this toning down is earlier (for example, the approaching scene is started). time) or later (for example, at the time of collision). Also, tone down does not have to be executed. Further, in the example of FIG. 33, the production button 41 is vibrated to generate a vibration sound when outputting the collision change sound, but the vibration sound does not have to be generated.

In the hold change effect shown in FIG. 33, an image effect in which an arrow flies toward a hold image is executed as a pre-hold change effect. The content is arbitrary, such as performing some action on the pending image of interest. In this way, even if the content of the pre-hold change effect is different, the items described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34 are similarly applicable.

Further, although FIGS. 33 and 34 have explained the suspension change effect as an example of the specific notice, the specific notice is not limited to the suspension change effect. The items described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34 are similarly applicable to any specific advance notice other than the pending change effect.

In the embodiment, as an effect for switching the line of sight of a player who is interested in using a smartphone during a game to the liquid crystal screen of the gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "effect to steal the line of sight"), the pending change effect shown in FIG. 33 is exemplified. However, as will be shown below, the production that catches the eye is not limited to this.

The reliability suggestion derived in the eye-catching production may be configured to increase the possibility of a premium result (reliability result suggesting/announcing that the change is a win). For example, other effects of the same kind as the eye-catching effect (such as not outputting an appearing sound), which are at least partially different from the eye-catching effect, for example, the eye-catching effect shown in FIG. , the possibility of deriving a premium result may be increased compared to the pending change effect other than that shown in FIG. Further, the execution ratio between the case where the reliability suggestion derived in the eye-catching effect is a premium result and the case where it is not may be 100:0. Of course, the production that steals the eye is not limited to the pending change production, but it can be anything such as a step-up notice, a pseudo-continuous production, a timer production, a conversation notice, a reach tenpai notice, a movable body production, and an SP reach development production. Also in these cases, the relationship between the eye-catching effect and the eye-catching effect and other similar effects may be as described above.

It is desirable to perform the eye-catching effect at a stage when the expectations have increased to some extent in fluctuations in which the expectation of winning is relatively high, such as when the reach is fluctuating during normal times. In this way, it is considered that the probability of success in moving the line of sight is increased by executing the line-of-sight effect at the timing when the player's degree of interest in the effect and the notice is increasing. For the same reason, the production that steals the eye can be performed before the change in reach and transition to SP reach (specifically, before the title display of SP reach) or during SP reach. good. Similarly, the production that steals the line of sight is more likely to be executed after reach than during normal fluctuation (non-tempai state), and during SP reach or after SP reach than after reach. It is desirable to configure

Also, the effect of stealing the line of sight may not be executed during the normal fluctuation (non-tempered state), but may be executed after the reach. Of course, on the contrary, the effect of depriving the line of sight may be performed during normal fluctuation (non-tempered state) and not performed after reach.

In addition, the production that steals the line of sight may be configured so that the execution probability is higher during the normal game state than during the special game state such as the variable probability state, and the execution ratio in that case is 100:0. may This is because the variable probability state is already in an advantageous state for the player, and there is a high possibility that the player is already looking at the liquid crystal screen. However, on the contrary, the effect of depriving the line of sight may be executed during the special game state such as the variable probability state, and may not be executed during the normal game state.

In addition, the production that steals the line of sight may be executed after reach without being executed during normal fluctuation (non-tenpai state), or may be executed during a special game state such as a variable state, and is not executed during a normal game state. It may be executed during Of course, on the contrary, the production that steals the line of sight may be executed during normal fluctuation (non-tenpai state) and may not be executed after reach, or it may be executed during special game state such as probability change state and normal game state. It may not be executed during the execution.

The eye-catching effect may be configured to be executed before the pseudo-continuous effect. As a result, the player whose line of sight is shifted to the liquid crystal screen can continue to see the pseudo continuous effect. In addition, the eye-catching effect may have a higher execution probability before the pseudo-continuous effect than after the pseudo-continuous effect (there are more executable eye-catching effects), and the execution ratio in that case is 100:0. may be Conversely, the execution probability of the eye-catching effect may be lower before the pseudo-continuous effect than after the pseudo-continuous effect (there are fewer executable eye-catching effects), and in that case, the execution ratio is It may be 0:100.

The production that steals the eye is better than other premium productions (productions that suggest that it is a win) and rainbow productions (a production that lights up the lamp with a specific light emission pattern that suggests that the fluctuation is a win). may be configured to run before As a result, it is possible to continuously show the premium effect and the rainbow effect to the player who has shifted his line of sight to the liquid crystal screen. Further, the eye-catching effect may have a higher execution probability before the premium effect or the rainbow effect than after, and the execution ratio in that case may be 100:0. Conversely, the execution probability of the eye-catching effect may be lower before the premium effect or the rainbow effect than after the effect, and in that case the execution ratio may be 0:100.

A plurality of visual effects may be executed during normal fluctuation (non-tempered state), after reach or during SP reach. In that case, the plurality of effects may be the same type of effect (each may be an effect related to pending change), or may be different types of effects or notices. Further, in that case, the effect of depriving the line of sight may be executed a plurality of times in one variation, or may be executed only once in one variation. Further, the reliability may be higher in the case where one change is executed a plurality of times than in the case where the change is executed only once.

It is desirable to set the effect that catches the eye as an announcement effect with a relatively high degree of reliability. For example, when the hold change effect is executed as an eye-catching effect, it may be configured such that content with a high degree of expectation (for example, red or higher) is more likely to be derived than other hold change effects. In addition, not only the pending change effect, even when executing other notices as effects that steal the line of sight, it is desirable to have the same configuration. It is advisable to give notice.

At the timing before executing the production that steals the line of sight, when executing the same kind of notice production (here, pending change production) as the production that steals the line of sight, the content with relatively low expectations (for example, below red) It is desirable to configure it so that it can be easily derived.

The production that is executed before the execution of the production that steals the eye in one variation is the same kind of production as the production that steals the eye (such as not outputting the sound that appears). It is a different effect, and for example, when the effect of depriving the line of sight is the pending change effect shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to make the effects and notices different before and after taking the player's line of sight, so that the effects and notices can be more effectively appealing to the player.

Before the eye-catching effect, an operation effect such as a button effect may not be executed, and the operation effect may be executed after the eye-catching effect. Since the operation performance is a performance that requires the player to operate buttons, etc., even if it is suddenly executed while the player is looking at a smartphone or the like, it is unlikely that the player will respond to the operation, and a sufficient performance effect can be obtained. because there is no Of course, the operation effect may be executed even before the effect of stealing the line of sight. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the operation effect after the eye-catching effect is more reliable than the operation effect before the eye-catching effect.

When the operation effect is executed even before the effect of stealing the line of sight, for example, in the operation effect before the effect of stealing the line of sight, the first operation effect (as an operation guidance image for prompting the player to operate, the reliability is relatively high) The operation effect using a low PUSH button image) tends to appear, and in the operation effect after the effect that steals the eye, the second operation effect (an operation effect using a relatively high-reliability patrol button image as an operation guidance image) (Embodiments in which the shape of the button changes are also possible)) may appear more easily. Also, in the operation effects before the eye-catching effect, only the first operation effect may appear, and in the operation effects after the eye-catching effect, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may appear. Either one may be configured to appear. As a result, only the first operation effect with a relatively low degree of reliability appears before the effect that steals the line of sight, so even if the player is absorbed in the smartphone and misses the operation effect, the effect will be small, and on the contrary, the player will not be able to see the line of sight. After the stealing effect, the player is less likely to miss the appearance of the first operation effect or the second operation effect, which has a relatively low degree of reliability, so that the player performs the effect while having a sense of tension. can enjoy.

When the operation effect is executed even before the eye-catching effect, for example, the number of operation effects that can be executed after the eye-catching effect is greater than the number of operation effects that can be executed before the eye-catching effect. It is desirable to configure

As the effect that catches the eye, an effect that accompanies an operation effect such as a button effect may be used. In this case, after outputting the appearing sound, the operation effect may be executed, and at the timing when the player operates the operating means, the collision change sound or the like may be output with a louder volume than the appearing sound, for example. You may

In the eye-catching presentation of the embodiment (FIG. 33), the player's attention is drawn by sound output, but the present invention is not limited to this, but is not limited to this, such as lamp emission, vibration, air blowing, temperature change of a specific portion, etc., or a combination thereof. may be configured to attract the player's attention by In that case, similar to the relation of sound output in the embodiment, the luminance of the lamp, the intensity of vibration, the wind speed, the temperature of a specific part, etc. are changed stepwise, such as at the time of appearance, at the time of fanning, and at the time of collision change. good too. In that case, all of the sound output setting contents related to the eye-catching effect described above can be replaced with lamps, vibrations, ventilation, temperature changes of specific portions, and the like.

The eye-catching effect may be executed only once during one variation, or may be executed a plurality of times. By executing the eye-catching effect multiple times, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will notice such effect. Further, in this case, with respect to the performance that deprives the eye of the audience a plurality of times, the reliability derived as a result of the performance executed later may be higher than the reliability derived as a result of the performance executed earlier. desirable. Also, the preceding effect and the subsequent effect may be of the same type (for example, pending change effect) or may be of different types.

When a player operates a smartphone during a game, the smartphone is often held slightly below the player's chest or near the upper tray 33 or the effect button 41 of the game machine. It is considered that the line of sight is directed toward the bottom of the gaming machine. Therefore, a lamp effect may be added in addition to the configuration of the embodiment in the effect that draws the eye. The lamp effect in this case preferably includes, for example, a light emitting effect (hereinafter referred to as a specific lamp effect) in which the lamps around the lower part of the gaming machine emit light. Specifically, among the lamps around the effect button 41 arranged at the lower center of the game machine frame, the lamps near the upper tray 33, and the lamps arranged around the glass door 7 of the game machine frame, It is desirable to light a lamp or the like. Also, since the player operates the shooting handle 35 with the right hand during the game, it is possible that the player is holding the smartphone with the left hand. It is considered effective to perform a ramp effect.

In addition, it is desirable to execute the specific lamp effect at the timing of starting the execution of the effect that draws the eye (in the embodiment, the timing at which the appearing sound is output). As a result, since the player who is looking at the smartphone can confirm the specific lamp effect in the peripheral vision, it is possible to make the effect of depriving the player's eye more effectively. As described above, it is desirable that the specific lamp effect is performed at the same time as the effect is started. However, the specific lamp effect may be executed during the effect. Specifically, it may be after the appearing sound is output, during or after the output of the fanning sound, during or after the output of the collision-changing sound, and the like. In this case, for example, at the output timing of the appearing sound, the specific lamp effect is not executed (the lamp effect other than the specific lamp effect may or may not be executed), and then the collision change sound is output. A specific lamp effect may be executed at the timing (a lamp effect other than the specific lamp effect may or may not be executed). As a result, at least the first effect means (sound output means) is used at the start (when outputting the appearing sound) in the effect that captures the eye (even if the liquid crystal image is used at the same time as in the embodiment). Good), at the timing when the effect result is actually derived (when the collision change sound is output), the effect is performed using the second effect means (lamp) in addition to the first effect means (liquid crystal display at the same time as in the embodiment) It is desirable to use an image), so the player operating the smartphone can grasp the content of the production through the effects of sounds and lamps even while looking at the smartphone. It is possible to provide multiple timings for switching the line of sight to the liquid crystal screen.

In addition, not limited to the above description, the first effect means and the second effect means are used at the start (when outputting the appearing sound), and at the timing when the effect result is actually derived (when outputting the collision change sound) Either the first effect means or the second effect means may be used. Also, both the first effect means and the second effect means may be used at both timings. In that case, it is desirable to vary the light emission pattern in the specific lamp effect at each timing. Also, the specific lamp effect at the start (when outputting the appearing sound) has a relatively long light emission time, and the specific lamp effect at the timing when the effect result is actually derived (when outputting the collision change sound) is the light emission time. A relatively short pattern may be used. Also, the opposite is possible. Further, not only the light emission time in the specific lamp effect, but also the light emission color and light emission mode (blinking, lighting fade, light extinction fade, etc.) may be varied.

When there are a plurality of visual effects, a specific appearing sound common to the plurality of effects may be output. As a result, the player operating the smart phone only has to pay attention to the specific appearing sound, so the burden on the player can be reduced. In addition, it is desirable not to use the specific appearing sound in that case in other announcement effects. As a result, it is possible to execute a more sharp and easy-to-understand announcement effect. In addition, when executing lamp emission, vibration, air blowing, temperature change of a specific part, etc. instead of outputting the appearing sound, or in conjunction with outputting the appearing sound, a specific light emission pattern or vibration pattern common to a plurality of effects , an air blowing pattern, and a temperature change pattern may be used.

Further, when a common effect mode is used among a plurality of effects in this manner, not only the appearing sound but also the fanning sound and the collision change sound may be common. In that case, all of them may be shared, or only some of them may be shared.

It is desirable that the output sound volume (dB) of the sound before execution of the eye-catching effect is low or mute. As a result, it is possible to make the sound that appears when executing the eye-catching effect more conspicuous, and it is possible to enhance the effect as a gimmick for the player's awareness.

It may be configured such that before execution of the eye-catching effect, an effect that is a precursor to the image effect is executed. For example, before outputting the appearing sound, the liquid crystal screen may be darkened with the visibility suppression image to express an atmosphere different from usual. As a result, it is possible to give the player looking at the smartphone a sense of incongruity due to the liquid crystal screen in the peripheral vision turning dark, and for the player looking at the liquid crystal screen , it is possible to express the sense of anticipation for the preview performance that will start from now on in the form of discomfort. Further, in that case, an image effect other than darkening by the visibility suppression image, for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image or character image may be executed. Further, the image of the arrow referred to in the embodiment, that is, the image used in the effect of depriving the line of sight may be used in the omen effect, but the arrow image is not limited to appearing first in the omen effect. It may be configured to execute another image rendering that suggests that an image will appear.

When using a production with a success pattern and a failure pattern as a production that steals the eye, there is a possibility that the success pattern will be executed in a production with a success pattern and a failure pattern that outputs an appearing sound (or the appearing sound is relatively loud). is high, and there is a success pattern and a failure pattern that do not output the appearance sound (or are relatively small), the probability that the failure pattern will be executed is high (at least compared to the case where the appearance sound is output). It may be configured so that the probability that the failure pattern is executed is high). Alternatively, the success pattern may be executed whenever the appearing sound is output.

FIG. 80 shows two examples of desirable settings of various items before and after the effect of stealing the eye during one pattern change.

Before the eye-catching effect, the player's line of sight is directed to a smartphone, etc., separate from the LCD screen. Regardless of the types of effects other than the depriving effect, it is basically considered preferable to execute them after the effect of depriving the eye of the player rather than before the effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), general notices (step-up notice, pseudo consecutive notice, timer notice, conversation notice, etc.), highly reliable notice, appearance of maker pattern, vibration effect, blowing effect, Reliability derived from operation effects (single-push effect, repeated-press effect, long-press effect), premier effect, highly-anticipated operation effect, eye-catching effect and other similar effects, blackout effect, and eye-catching effect For announcement effects that can derive a higher degree of reliability than results, effects with success patterns and failure patterns, one-shot announcement effects such as fixed sound effects and rainbow effects, the appearance rate, the number of points (timings) that can appear, Regarding the degree of derivation possibility (possibility that the effect will be executed in the derivation part after execution of the predetermined effect), it is generally higher after the effect that steals the eye than before. It is desirable to set Similarly, the average output volume is set to be higher after the eye-catching effect than before, and the timing of the maximum output volume is set after the eye-catching effect. It is desirable to set the maximum output lamp brightness after the production that attracts the eye.

Further, as indicated by an arrow in the upper part of FIG. 80(a), among the variation times of one variation, the variation time after the eye-catching effect is longer than the variation time before the eye-catching effect. It is desirable to configure As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time after the player pays attention to the liquid crystal screen, so that the player can enjoy the liquid crystal presentation more meaningfully.

In this way, it is most desirable to set the effects before and after the effect that catches the eye, as shown in FIG. 80(a). It is not realistic to set

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80(b), effects that are premised to be executed in the second half of the fluctuation, such as a highly reliable advance notice, the appearance of a manufacturer's pattern, a premium effect, and an operation effect with a high degree of expectation, appear as a rule. rate, the number of points (timing) that can appear, and the degree of derivation possibility (possibility that the effect will be executed in the derivation part after execution of the predetermined effect) is higher than before the effect that steals the eye. Set so that the latter is more frequent, but other general notices (step-up notice, pseudo-continuation notice, timer notice, conversation notice, etc.), vibration effects, blowing effects, operation effects (one-push effects, Continuous hit effect, long press effect), other effects of the same kind as the effect that steals the eye, blackout effect, effect derived from the effect that steals the eye. For effects with patterns, one-shot announcement effects such as fixed sound effects and rainbow effects, the appearance rate, the number of points (timing) that can appear, and the possibility of derivation (after the execution of the predetermined effect, the effect is executed in the derivation part. It may be set so that the amount (possibility/non-existence) of the possibility of being performed is greater before the effect that catches the eye than after the effect. In addition, the average output volume is set higher before the eye-catching effect than after the eye-catching effect, the maximum output volume timing is set before the eye-catching effect, and the lighting frequency of the lamp effect is set for the eye-catching effect. The timing of the maximum output lamp brightness may be set before the eye-catching presentation by setting the amount of brightness in the front to be higher than in the back.

In both FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b), among the variation time of one variation, the variation time after the eye-catching effect is longer than the variation time before the eye-catching effect. , but on the contrary, it may be configured so that the variable time before the visual-stealing effect is longer than the variable time after the visual-stealing effect.

As for the output volume of the sound emitted from the game machine, it is possible to make the production more interesting by outputting a louder sound. sound output. For example, when one of our company's machines is installed in a hall, by outputting a louder sound than the adjacent machines of other companies, the sound output from the other company's machines is blocked and the company's machines are used. This is because it is considered that it can be made more conspicuous. However, if such competition is allowed, problems such as noise in the hall will be induced, so a certain limit is set on the output sound volume when manufacturing game machines. Under such restrictions and conditions in the manufacture of gaming machines, in order to execute voice effects with more inflection and sharpness, it is possible to construct an effect system that changes the sound volume level as described in the embodiment. desirable.

The sound volume (dB) data shown in the embodiment is measured by picking up sound emitted from the gaming machine with a sound collecting microphone. Therefore, these data are not a little affected by ambient environmental sounds. For example, in the embodiment, the volume does not become 0 dB even in the mute state, and the data maintains a predetermined volume value. In this way, since there is always some kind of environmental sound around the game machine, the problem of the sound volume of the game machine cannot be considered separately from the surrounding environmental sound. It is necessary to manufacture so that the volume emitted from is within a certain range. Conversely, even if the ambient sound is completely eliminated and the sound volume (dB) emitted purely by the gaming machine is measured by some method, the obtained data may not reflect the actual installation situation of the gaming machine. It is completely unsuitable for usage conditions and is meaningless data.

Moreover, regarding the sound emitted by the game machine, it is necessary to consider not only the sound output from the speaker but also the operation sound such as the vibration sound when the effect button or the like is vibrated, as shown in the embodiment. In recent years, in particular, a wide variety of productions using movable objects have been performed. There are many productions accompanied by loud operation sounds, such as productions in which an object such as a button is reciprocated in a predetermined direction such as up and down, left and right at high speed to output a rattling sound. In these productions, the volume of the impact noise caused by the movement of the action buttons and other objects colliding with the surrounding decorations and structures has increased. It is necessary to design a suitable production. In addition, while the volume of the sound output from the speaker (normal sound effect) can be changed, the volume of the operation sound (specific sound effect) such as vibration sound cannot be changed, so it is possible to set multiple levels. It is necessary to establish a relationship between the sound volume level and the vibration sound volume and the like so that each sound volume level has a more optimal correspondence relationship. The above-described embodiment discloses an example in which the performance system is constructed in a form considered to be more optimal.

In the embodiment, when the player touches or presses the vibrating production button 41, the driving of the production button (predetermined portion) 41 by the vibrating device (driving means) 72 is limited, and the production button 41 Although it has been described that the volume of the vibration sound can be adjusted compared to the non-touching state, the adjustment of the vibration sound as the specific sound effect is not limited to this. For example, change the vibration amplitude when a predetermined part such as the effect button 41 is vibrated by the driving means such as the vibrating device 72, the speed (frequency) when the vibration is performed, the frequency of the vibration, etc. It may be possible to adjust the volume of the vibration sound, etc., by configuring them so that they can be changed by operating a vibration sound adjustment operating means (switch/button, etc.). In this case, the vibration sound adjusting operation means may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 1 so that it can be operated by the player, or it can be provided on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 so that it can be operated only by those involved in the hall. may be set to In addition, the adjustment amount may be changed stepwise or steplessly (continuously), and the front side of the game machine main body 1 is provided so that the adjustment amount (adjustment level, etc.) can be grasped by the player or the person involved in the hall. display means (liquid crystal display means 106, etc.) or display means on the rear side of the main body 1 of the game machine.

When the vibration sound can be adjusted by pressing the production button (predetermined portion) 41 or the like by hand, the amount of change in the vibration sound is changed according to the operation amount (operation range), operation force, etc. You may In this case, the volume may be changed stepwise or steplessly (continuously) according to the operation amount, the operation force, and the like.

It may be configured such that other movable bodies such as the board and the frame are not operated when the vibration sound is generated as the specific sound effect. Further, after operating the movable body such as the board or the frame, the vibration sound may be generated by the production button 41 or the like.

The vibration sound as the specific sound production may be generated at a timing other than the one illustrated in the embodiment. For example, in the example of FIG. 41, after the button is pressed (49 s), the timing (eg, 51 s) at approximately the same time as the display of the rainbow effect on the liquid crystal, the timing after the display of the rainbow effect (eg, 61 s), and the timing after that (eg, 61 s). It may be executed while the liquid crystal presentation is in progress (for example, from 62s). Also, at that time, vibration effects are performed with a vibration pattern according to the progress of the liquid crystal effect (for example, vibrating according to the attack motion of the main character or the motion of a monster falling down), and it is configured to generate a vibration sound. may

In the embodiment, when the specific sound effect (vibration effect, etc.) is not executed, the first setting volume (for example, volume level 3) and the second setting volume (for example, volume level 7) are set. Although the volume increase rate (volume ratio) due to the sound effect is uniform (for example, 1.2), this is not limiting, and the volume increase rate when the specific sound effect is not executed may be configured to change. good. Even in such a case, it is desirable that the rate of volume increase is reduced when the specific sound effect is executed.

In the embodiment, the rate of increase in volume (volume ratio) due to the sound effect is substantially constant (for example, 1.2) when the player setting value is set to the minimum value and when it is set to the maximum value in the selectable range. However, the rate of increase in sound volume (volume ratio) due to sound effects at any two values in the selectable range of the player setting values may be made substantially constant.

The rate of increase in volume when the volume level is raised by one step may be configured to differ according to the stage of the volume level (for example, between 1→2 and 2→3). In that case, the rate of increase may be different for each volume level, or only the rate of increase in some step changes may be different from the rate of increase in other step changes.

When the upper limit of the volume level that can be changed by the player can be changed by the hall officials (for example, in the case of FIGS. 49, 59, etc.), the volume of the normal sound effect is higher than the volume of the specific sound effect. The number of player setting values that makes the sound difficult to hear (hereinafter referred to as the first player setting value number), and the volume of the normal sound effect is lower than the volume of the specific sound effect, and the sound of the specific sound effect is audible. It is desirable to provide a hole set value that is substantially the same as the number of player set values that facilitates (hereinafter referred to as the second player set value number). Also, in that case, the hole set value where the first player's set value number is larger than the second player's set value number, and the first player's set value number is larger than the second player's set value number. Although it is desirable to provide both the small hole setting value, only one of them may be provided.

As shown in the embodiment, the rate of volume increase during execution of the specific sound effect may be varied according to the timing at which the specific sound effect is executed. In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the rate of increase is the smallest at the timing of notifying the winning result at the end of reach.

The number of steps of the sound volume level that can be adjusted by the player's operation is not limited to 5 steps, and may be less than 5 steps or 6 steps or more. Also, even if the number of steps of the volume level that can be adjusted is changed by the player's operation, there is no problem as long as the rate of volume increase is the value described in the embodiment at the lowest and highest levels.

When there are a plurality of vibration patterns in the vibration presentation, the output volume of the vibration sound may be made different for each vibration pattern. In this case, it is desirable to configure the output volume of the vibration sound that accompanies the vibration effect performed when notifying the success/fail result at the end of the ready-to-win game to be maximized. In addition, a vibration pattern in which vibration is generated intermittently and a vibration pattern in which vibration is continuously generated are provided, and the volume of the vibration sound is the same, but the former has a period in which the vibration is stopped. It may be configured so that the sound volume due to vibration is reduced.

A plurality of normal sound effects may be executed while the vibrating sound is generated as the specific sound effect. Moreover, each of the plurality of normal sound effects and the vibration sound as the specific sound effect may be executed in the same period or at the same timing. Alternatively, the first normal sound effect may be executed while the vibrating sound is being output as the specific sound effect, and then the second normal sound effect may be executed. Also, the first normal sound effect is executed while the vibration sound is being output as the specific sound effect, and the second normal sound effect is executed while the first normal sound effect is being executed. You may

The normal sound effect may be executed before outputting the vibration sound generated by the vibration effect as the specific sound effect. Further, the normal sound effect may be executed at substantially the same timing as the timing of outputting the vibration sound as the specific sound effect.

At the timing of starting the output of the vibration sound generated by the vibration effect as the specific sound effect or during the output of the vibration sound, the normal sound effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is executed, and then the predetermined sound effect is performed. It may be configured to output a different normal sound effect (eg, BGM after pressing a button) at different timings.

The BGM may be output after the button is pressed at the timing of starting to output the vibration sound generated by the vibration effect as the specific sound effect or during the output of the vibration sound. In this case, it is desirable that the data of the BGM after pressing the button is created so that the first half is muted or low-pitched, and the volume of the BGM increases during or after the vibrating sound is output. Conversely, the volume of the first half may be high, and the volume of the BGM may be muted or reduced during or after the output of the vibrating sound.

Before starting the output of the vibration sound as the specific sound effect, the reach effect BGM is stopped so that the volume (dB) of the normal sound effect is relatively small, and after the vibration sound is output, the normal sound effect is used. It is desirable to output a sound different from the ready-to-win effect BGM so that the volume (dB) is relatively large. As a result, the sound volume (dB) is modulated before and after the vibrating sound, making it possible to execute a more effective sound effect. Also, in order to add intonation not only to the sound but also to the lamps, before the vibration sound is output, the light is turned off or the light emission luminance and frequency are reduced, and after the vibration sound is output, the light is turned on or the light emission luminance and frequency are increased. may be configured.

It is desirable to output each normal sound effect using a different reproduction CH among a plurality of audio reproduction CHs.

Of the various sounds output from the speaker, the specific sound may be unaffected by the player's volume adjustment. In this case, since the specific sound is not affected by the volume adjustment, for example, when the volume level is set to the lowest level by the volume adjustment by the player, the sounds other than the specific sound output from the speaker are set to the lowest level. while the specific sound is output at a predetermined level such as the highest level or intermediate level. By configuring in this manner, the specific sound can be output so as to be more easily audible to the player than the other sounds, regardless of which volume level is set. It is desirable to use this specific sound, for example, in an effect with a relatively high degree of reliability, or in an effect that draws the eye in the embodiment. As a result, even if the sound volume value is set to the lowest level, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize highly reliable effects and eye-catching effects.

Further, the volume of the specific sound may be set to be the same as that of the error notification sound. Further, when outputting the specific sound, the sounds other than the specific sound may be faded out, for example, to be mute or low-pitched, thereby making the specific sound more prominent. Further, the specific sound may be excluded from the targets for fade-out processing, muting, or small sound when a sound with a relatively high priority is output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific sound from becoming difficult to hear even when the output of the specific sound and the sound presentation with a relatively high priority are executed in parallel. It should be noted that when an error is reported, it is desirable that the specific sound be muted or quieted so as not to interfere with the error notification. Further, it is desirable to set the volume of the specific sound so that it is easier to listen to than the operation sound in the specific sound presentation, such as the vibration sound. Further, when it is desired to make the vibration sound (the operation sound in the specific sound effect) stand out as an effect representation, the vibration sound may be configured to be easier to hear than the specific sound.

In addition, as an example of outputting the specific sound in the above-mentioned eye-catching effect (holding change effect, etc.), all the sounds output in the eye-catching effect are set as the specific sound so as not to be affected by volume adjustment. can be Alternatively, only the sound that appears when an arrow appears may be set as the specific sound. Also, only the collision sound when the arrow collides with the hold may be set as the specific sound. Also, both the appearing sound and the collision sound may be set as the specific sound. In this way, by using the specific sound as the series of sounds output as the notice sound, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the effect that catches the player's eye. In addition, by using only the particularly important appearing sounds and collision sounds as the specific sounds, it is possible to make the player recognize the highly important sounds more precisely without being redundant.

In the embodiment, the role effect and the rainbow effect are reproduced in one cut (for example, 49s to 60s in FIG. 41), but this is not restrictive and may be reproduced as separate cuts, or during the rainbow effect. may be configured to display a different rainbow effect by inserting a cut in the . In this case, it is desirable that the rainbow effect before and after the cut switching be similar or similar in display mode.

In the embodiment, by not inserting cuts during the output of the vibration sound as the specific sound effect, the player is made more aware of the vibration effect and the effect of the effect is enhanced. You may insert a cut wari during the output of .

The production scene on the liquid crystal screen may be progressed and cuts may be switched during the operation of the movable body, while it is stopped at the production position after the operation, or while returning from the production position to the origin position. As a result, the performance scene can be progressed without stopping even during the movement of the movable body. In addition, by switching cuts, the content of the production scene changes during the movement of the movable body, so it is possible to execute a production rich in unexpectedness. Also, in this case, it is desirable to display different characters in the preceding and succeeding production scenes. In addition, the presence or absence of a character may be expressed using cut divisions, such as switching cuts so that a character being displayed is not displayed in the next scene. Moreover, this is applicable not only during the movement of the movable body but also during execution of the operation presentation. The operation effect can be considered before the operation button image is displayed, while the operation button image is displayed, and after the operation button image is displayed, and the above contents are replaced with the operation effect. You may

When the operation performance is executed after the action of the movable body, it is desirable to execute the operation performance after switching the cut of the performance scene at least once or more after finishing the action of the movable body. As a result, after the action of the movable body, the production scene progresses once, and the operation production can be executed after the player can grasp the progress content accompanying the switching of the production scene. It is easy to grasp the content of the production, and the production structure can be grasped in units of each block, so that it is possible to perform a more interesting production progress. Further, it is desirable to adopt the same configuration not only in the case of executing the operation presentation after the action of the movable body, but also in the case of executing the action presentation of the movable body after the execution of the operation presentation. In addition, the same configuration may be used not only for the action of the movable body and the operation presentation, but also for the execution of other presentations. For example, it is possible to adopt the same configuration even in the case of executing a cut-in notice suggesting the reliability of the variation or the ready-to-reach effect before and after the action of the movable body or before and after the operation effect. . Also, the mode may be changed depending on the content of the effect to be executed. That is, when the operation effect is executed after the action of the movable body, cuts of the effect scene are performed during that time. It may be configured not to do so. As a result, the player grasps whether or not there is a change in the performance scene after the predetermined performance is executed first, so that it is possible to guess the details of the execution of the predetermined performance thereafter. The contents described above are merely examples, and the contents of the previous predetermined effect and the contents of the later predetermined effect are not particularly limited. In other words, it is important whether or not the cut split is executed during the interval, not limited to the content of the advance notice before and after it.

Before executing the operation effect at the end of the reach, if you want to display the reach symbol (eg "7 ↓ 7") on the liquid crystal and send the undetermined symbol (medium symbol) sequentially, For example, while the symbols are sent in order of ``717'' ⇒ ``727'' ⇒ ... ``757'', the cut of the production scene that is executed behind it may be switched, but ``777'', which is the jackpot production mode, may be changed. It is desirable to configure so as not to switch cuts of the production scene after a predetermined timing at which, for example, is approaching. The predetermined timing is arbitrary, for example, it may be when it reaches "767" one step before "777" which is the jackpot effect mode, or when the subsequent charging period starts (output of lamp or sound may be the timing to reduce the Further, when the operation effect is executed at the timing of "767", the cut of the effect scene may be switched until the effect button image fades in, and may not be switched after that. is displayed and the operation valid period has started, it may be configured not to switch, or regardless of whether the effect button image is displayed and the operation valid period has started or not, "767 or the like is displayed, cut switching may not be performed at the start of the charge period (timing at which the output of the lamp or sound is reduced) or after that. In this way, by permitting or restricting cut switching of production scenes before, during, or after executing specific advance notice effects such as pattern feed and operation effects, more sharp and easy-to-understand ready-to-reach effects are executed. It becomes possible to

By changing the frequency of switching of the production scene by cut division, it is also possible to execute a fanning production to determine whether or not the specific production is to be executed. For example, the result of executing the operation effect is to incite the success or failure of the first scene (e.g., the face of the main character) and the second scene (e.g., the face of a monster) alternately, gradually increasing the speed. By switching so as to become, a fanning effect may be executed until success or failure is known. In addition, it is desirable to make the effect expression different between the case where the cut is switched as a fanning effect and the case where the cut is switched as a production scene progresses instead of the fanning effect. Specifically, when switching between cuts as a stimulating effect, the first scene and the second scene are alternately repeated, so that the expression does not progress to the third scene that precedes it. Thus, it is possible to give the player the impression that the progress of the production scene has temporarily stopped here. On the other hand, when the cuts are switched for the purpose of progressing the production scene, if the first scene and the second scene are alternately repeated, the player may misunderstand that the progress has stopped. In addition, by performing such an expression at a timing when the fanning is not particularly necessary, there is no distinction between when the fanning effect is really desired and when the fanning effect is really desired, the effect expression becomes difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, in this case, it is desirable not to use expressions such as alternately switching similar scenes, or not to use them frequently.

A white-out image or a black-out image may be interposed at the timing of switching cuts. Specifically, by switching from the first scene to the white-out image to the second scene, it is more difficult to understand the appearance because the scene switches suddenly than when switching from the first scene to the second scene. It is possible to reduce the In this case, although there are three cuts including the intermediate scene (white image), the cut length of the intermediate scene (whiteout) is shorter than the cut length of the first scene and/or the second scene. is desirable. As a result, the player can recognize that the contents of the first scene and the second scene are related to the ready-to-win effect, and the intermediate scene (white-out) is recognized by the player as an image that is not directly related to the ready-to-win effect. It is possible to In this way, there are two scenes (first scene and second scene) for expressing the content of the reach effect, and a scene (intermediate scene) that is executed to express the content of the reach effect in an easy-to-understand manner and to give an impact. Alternatively, the running scale may be different, or the effects of lamps and sounds during the execution of the first scene and/or the second scene and the intermediate scene (whiteout) may be different. A lamp or sound that is output according to the execution of the intermediate scene (whiteout) may be prepared. In addition, such an expression may be used in the production of agitation, for example, the switching of production scenes such as 1st scene ⇒ intermediate scene (whiteout) ⇒ 2nd scene ⇒ intermediate scene (whiteout) ⇒ first scene is repeated. You may be made to perform an agitation production by this. Also, when the first scene and the second scene are alternately repeated such as the first scene, the intermediate scene (whiteout), the second scene, and the first scene, the first scene is switched to the second scene. An intermediate scene (whiteout) may be provided only between the two.

It may be configured such that the reliability of the ready-to-win effect differs depending on the number of cut divisions. For example, a ready-to-win effect with many cuts may be set to have a higher degree of reliability than a ready-to-win effect with fewer cuts. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the ready-to-win effect can be expected by counting the number of cut switching times. , it becomes possible to enjoy reach production. Alternatively, a ready-to-win effect that does not switch cuts at all may be performed. The player can enjoy the ready-to-win effect while hoping that the cut will not be switched. In this way, by constructing a plurality of ready-to-reach productions with different numbers of cut divisions and a ready-to-reach production without cut divisions, the interest of the entire ready-to-reach production can be enhanced, and a higher quality production system can be achieved. It is possible to build

During reach production, if there is a specific production with a higher display priority than that (notice that suggests reliability, advance notice of reach production, etc.), it will be executed in the background during the execution of that specific production. It may also be configured such that cut switching is executed by advancing the production scene of the ready-to-win production. Also, during the execution of a specific effect, the image of the reach effect behind it may be completely invisible, or a visibility suppression image (solid black) etc. may be superimposed on the reach effect to make it visible but difficult to see. Alternatively, the specific effect may simply be executed superimposed on the ready-to-win effect. Then, it is desirable to limit the end timing so that the timing at which execution of the specific effect ends does not overlap with the cut switching timing of the ready-to-win effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the cut is switched immediately after the end of the specific effect, making it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the ready-to-win effect. Moreover, the same thing can be said about the start timing of the specific effect. Also, it is desirable that the same character is displayed in the performance scene before execution of the specific performance and in the performance scene after execution of the specific performance. As a result, the production scene is switched by switching cuts during the specific production, but since the same character is displayed before and after the specific production, it is possible to suppress the visual difficulty while progressing the production scene. . On the other hand, if more emphasis is placed on unexpectedness, different characters may be displayed before and after the specific effect, or characters displayed in the previous scene may not be displayed in the subsequent scene.

In the embodiment, during the execution of the display effect, after stopping the output of the first BGM (after executing the first sound effect), after a BGM stop period (output stop period), the second BGM is output (execution of the second sound effect). An example has been shown in which the scene of the display effect is changed from the first scene to the second scene at the timing of outputting the second BGM (executing the second sound effect). The effect and the second sound effect are not limited to BGM, and may be an arbitrary sound effect outputting an arbitrary sound such as a telop voice. In addition, after the execution of the first sound effect, until the start of the execution of the second sound effect, it may be a silence period in which no sound is output from the speaker, or it is different from the first sound effect and / or the second sound effect A predetermined sound may be output.

In the sound volume level setting tables (FIGS. 49 and 53) of the second and third embodiments, the predetermined step value is constant for each hall setting value for the hall setting values corresponding to the normal mode and the power saving mode. For example, the predetermined step value may be changed such that the sound volume level corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5 is 3→4→6→9→13. In addition, in the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 49 and 53) of the second and third embodiments, the volume level of player setting values other than the minimum may be the same among a plurality of hall setting values.

In the embodiment, the volume level of the error sound can be adjusted by the volume control knob 140 but not by the volume control means 39. It may be configured so that the volume level cannot be adjusted.

Even if the volume level of the error sound (and the specific notification sound) can be adjusted with the volume adjustment knob 140, the lamp light amount level at the time of error notification may not be adjustable.

When the volume level of the error sound (and the specific notification sound) can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140, the specific type of notification sound (for example, the RAM clear notification sound) among the error sounds can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140. It may be disabled (eg always at maximum volume level). Even if a specific type of notification sound (for example, the RAM clear notification sound) cannot be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140, if the volume adjustment knob 140 is set to silent, the specific type of notification sound (for example, the RAM clear notification sound) sound) may be switched to silence or a predetermined low volume.

For example, in the fourteenth embodiment (FIG. 71), if the upper limit of the normal volume level is lower than the maximum volume level, the error volume level is set higher than the upper limit. , the upper limit (maximum volume level) is set to the error volume level, but the error volume level for at least some hall setting values may be higher than the maximum volume level at the normal volume level.

In the various examples described above, a lower limit value may be provided for the error sound volume level so that the error sound volume level does not fall below the lower limit value even when the volume control knob 140 is operated to the small side.

The volume level of the error sound may also be configured to be adjustable by both volume adjustment knob 140 and volume operation means 39 . In that case, the volume level setting table for normal sound may be applied as it is to error sound, or a volume level setting table for error sound may be provided separately. However, even in that case, the lamp light amount level at the time of error notification may not be adjusted by the player's operation.

Although the upper limit value of the volume level differs for each hall setting value, the initial volume level (volume level corresponding to the initial position) may be the same (FIG. 62). In this case, even if the initial sound volume level is the same, the display of the sound volume adjustment notification image PV may be made different by changing the initial position.

The upper limit value of the volume level corresponding to the hall setting value in the power saving mode may be any of the maximum value, minimum value, and intermediate value of the volume level in the normal mode.

The volume adjustment notification period is started not only when the volume operation means 39 is operated, but also when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated, and the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106. good too.

In the embodiment, the light amount level is not provided with an operation means such as the volume adjustment knob 140, and can be adjusted only by operating the light amount operation means 40. The light amount level is also the same as the sound volume level described above. Alternatively, it may be configured so that it can be adjusted by a light amount adjusting knob (operation means A) arranged on the rear side of the game machine main body 1 and the light amount operation means 40 . That is, all the descriptions regarding the sound volume level mentioned above can be read as the light amount level. In this case, a light amount adjustment knob may be provided separately from the volume adjustment knob 140, or the volume adjustment knob 140 and the light amount adjustment knob may be shared. When a light amount adjustment knob is provided separately from the volume adjustment knob 140, the number of stages of hall setting values may be changed. Also, the number of steps of the player setting value may be changed for the sound volume and the amount of light.

With respect to the volume level setting table shown in FIG. 49, etc., the minimum value that can be selected by the player for each hole setting value is the same value for each hole setting value, and the player selects according to the selected hole setting value. By varying the possible amount of change in the set value, each upper limit value is made different, but this is not restrictive. By making the amounts of change in the set values that can be selected by the player to be the same according to the selected hole set values, the upper limits may be set to be different.

Regarding the error sound volume level setting table shown in FIG. volume level setting table may be referred to. In this case, by setting all the values selectable based on one hole set value to the same value, the sound volume level setting table for the error sound can be set by the player operating the operation means on the front side during an error. is changed, the selected values are all the same, so the actual output volume level is not changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from changing the output sound volume level during the error notification. Further, when the reference destination of the error sound volume level setting table is changed by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, different values are selected before and after the change. will change the actual output volume. As a result, the hall staff can change the output sound volume level during the error notification. Further, when the reference destination of the error sound volume level setting table is changed by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, the error sound volume is adjusted so that the same value is selected before and after the change. By setting a value in the level setting table, the output sound volume level during error reporting may be configured to be unchangeable by the hall staff.

When the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV being displayed may be hidden. Alternatively, after the information is temporarily hidden, it may be displayed again. Moreover, when displaying again, it is desirable to update and display the display content of the volume adjustment notification image PV according to the value updated after the change. In addition, when it is displayed again, it may be displayed with a volume adjustment operation by the player as a trigger, or it may be displayed again at a timing when a predetermined time has passed after the non-display.

Regarding the volume adjustment notification image PV shown in FIG. It is desirable to set the priority of the display of (1) so as to be ahead of the effect display and symbol display related to the game. Also, at least the bar indicating the current volume level value may be set to have a higher priority than the effect display and pattern display related to the game, and the bar indicating the selectable range and the non-selectable range may be set. The priority of display of the bar may be set lower than that of the effect display and pattern display related to the game. Alternatively, the configuration may be reversed. In addition, the bar indicating the non-selectable range is set to be in front of the effect display and the pattern display, and at least one of the bar indicating the current volume level value and the bar indicating the selectable range is displayed as a game-related effect. The priority of display may be set lower than that of display and pattern display.

Also, the bar indicating the current sound volume level value, the bar indicating the selectable range, and the bar indicating the non-selectable range are displayed in a transparent display mode, so that the priority of each display can be changed to effect display related to the game. Even when set to be in front of the symbol display, it is possible to perform the display without lowering the visibility of the effect display and the symbol display related to the game. In this case, at least one or all of the bar indicating the current volume level value, the bar indicating the selectable range, and the bar indicating the non-selectable range should be displayed in a transparent manner. may

The sub-control means (sub-control board) has a storage area (hard Vol) for storing the volume value based on the volume control knob 140 and a storage area (soft Vol) for storing the volume value based on the operation of the volume control means 39. You may prepare. These stores the setting values selected from the volume level setting table described above. The volume value based on the volume adjustment knob 140 is a predetermined value selected from the volume level setting table based on the initial position described above, and the volume value based on the operation of the volume operation means 39 is based on the player's operation. is a predetermined value selected from the volume level setting table.

Incidentally, in each embodiment described later, it is desirable to use a volume level setting table in which each upper limit value is set as the initial position as the initial position set according to the position of the volume adjustment knob 140. It is not limited to this. Also, the volume value based on the volume control means 39 is set to a predetermined value selected from the volume level setting table based on the initial position. A predetermined value may be obtained from the error table according to the position of 140 and stored in a storage area (hard Vol) for storing the volume value based on the volume control knob 140 .

First, when the power is turned on, a predetermined value corresponding to the position of volume control knob 140 is stored in a storage area (hard Vol) and a storage area (soft Vol). Then, based on the predetermined value stored in the storage area (soft Vol), a storage area (soft Vol ) is stored. In this manner, initial setting processing for setting predetermined values in the respective storage areas is performed when the power is turned on.

After the initial setting process is completed, a monitoring process is performed to periodically compare and monitor the position of the volume control knob 140 and the contents of the storage area (hard Vol). In this monitoring process, if the position of the volume control knob 140 and the contents of the storage area (hard Vol) match, the monitoring process is terminated. , a predetermined value corresponding to the changed position of the volume control knob 140 is stored in the storage area (hard Vol) and the storage area (soft Vol), respectively. Subsequently, based on the value of the storage area (soft Vol) after the change, a new predetermined value is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume used to determine the final output sound. remembered. Through this series of processing, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated, the output sound emitted by the gaming machine is changed.

Next, change processing when the volume operation means 39 is operated by the player will be described. When the player operates the volume operation means 39, the predetermined value corresponding to the operation is not stored in the storage area (hard Vol), but is stored only in the storage area (soft Vol). Subsequently, based on the value of the storage area (soft Vol) after the change, a new predetermined value is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume used to determine the final output volume. remembered. Through these series of processes, when the volume operation means 39 is operated, the output volume emitted by the gaming machine is changed. Further, when the player operates the volume control means 39, the change processing described above is executed, and the display processing for transmitting a signal for displaying the volume adjustment notification image PV on the display means is executed. By combining these processes, the output sound volume of the game machine is adjusted, and the player can know the details of the adjustment.

Next, an error sound with a higher priority than game-related sounds (not limited to notifying an abnormality of the gaming machine, but including, for example, RAM clear notification, backup return notification, setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, etc.) is output. Error notification processing in this case will be described.

When a specific error occurs, the predetermined value for error output is not stored in the storage area (soft Vol), but the storage area (soft Vol) for storing the total volume used to determine the final output volume. (total volume storage area). As a result, when a specific error occurs, the output sound emitted by the gaming machine is changed to an error output sound. Also, while the error sound is being output, it is necessary to stop the output of game-related sounds to make the error sound stand out. For that reason, the error volume value for determining the output sound of the channel where the error sound is registered is set to the maximum value, and the game volume value for determining the output sound of the channel where the sound related to the game is registered is set. Set the volume value to 0. Incidentally, the sub-control means determines the final output volume from the relationship between the game volume value, the error volume value, and the predetermined value stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). For example, if either value is 0, the final output volume is 0 regardless of the other value. In this way, the sub-control means sets/changes the game volume value and the error volume value, and sets/changes the predetermined value stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). It is configured to adjust the appropriate output volume. In addition, a plurality of game volume values and error volume values may be prepared instead of one type. You may do so. In this case, the game-related sound is emitted at the output volume calculated by the game primary volume value, the game secondary volume value, and the total volume value, and the error sound is generated by the error primary volume value and the error 2 volume value. It will be emitted at the output volume calculated from the next volume value and the total volume value.

An example in which a specific error occurs will now be described. For example, when a specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) occurs, the error state is notified using the sound, lamp, and display means of the gaming machine. At this time, the sub-control means refers to the error flag indicating the error state, and executes notification using sound, lamp, and display means. ), the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume. As a result, when an error occurs, the total volume is determined based on the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) rather than the storage area (soft Vol). It is determined based on a predetermined value corresponding to the position of adjustment knob 140 . With this configuration, the output sound volume during error occurrence can be adjusted/changed by the sound volume adjustment knob 140, and the hall employee can adjust/change the output sound volume during error occurrence. In addition, since the predetermined value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is not referred to while an error is occurring, even if the player operates the volume control means 39, the storage area (soft Vol) Determines the total volume based on the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) regardless of whether the value of the soft Vol has changed (which may or may not change). Therefore, the value of the storage area (total volume storage area) is not changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an act of intentionally lowering the output sound volume during an error occurrence to make it difficult to detect fraudulent activity.

In this case, it is desirable that the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed on the display means even if the player operates the volume control means 39 while an error is occurring. Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the content of adjustment of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. It is desirable that the content of adjustment be configured so as not to be reflected in the actual output volume.

In this case, the player may be allowed to adjust the amount of light. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern can be adjusted according to the game effect, it is desirable to configure so that the brightness of the light emission pattern cannot be adjusted according to the error. Further, it may be possible to disable the light amount adjustment by the player during the error notification.

Then, when the specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) ends, the sub-control means refers to the fact that the error flag indicating the error state is turned OFF, and the sound/lamp/display means end the notification using . At this time, with the error flag OFF as a trigger, the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume, instead of the storage area (hard Vol). Then, as before the error occurs, the total volume is set based on the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol).

Next, a case where a specific error 2 (eg, door open error) occurs will be described (a description of the same parts as in the above-described specific error 1 will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described). When a door open error occurs, the game machine's sounds, lamps, and display means are used to notify the user of the error state. The notification ends at a predetermined timing, the error notification by the display means ends at the timing of the event that is the target of the error (here, the door is closed), and the error notification by the lamp is the event that is the target of the error (here, the door is closed). is configured to end at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the end of .

(Pattern 1) The effect control means uses the presence or absence of an error sound output as a trigger at a predetermined timing to end the error notification by sound, and the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) instead of the storage area (hard Vol). is stored in a storage area for storing the total volume (total volume storage area). In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed until a predetermined timing when the error notification by sound is terminated, and can be displayed at a predetermined timing when the error notification by sound is terminated (it can be displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation). or intentionally displayed). As a modification example when the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed here, the content of the volume adjustment notification image PV described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) may be the same as the content of the volume adjustment notification image PV.

Also, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume adjustment by operating the volume operation means 39 may be configured in the same manner as the specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) described above.

(Pattern 2) The production control means uses the detection of the event that is the target of the error (here, the door is closed) as a trigger at a predetermined timing when the event that is the target of the error (here, the door is closed). The value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume, not in the hard Vol).

In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV is hidden until a predetermined timing when the error target event (here, door closing) ends, and at a predetermined timing when the error target event (here, door closing) ends. It may be possible to display by pressing (display when the player performs an adjustment operation, or display it intentionally). As a modification example when the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed here, the content of the volume adjustment notification image PV described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) may be the same as the content of the volume adjustment notification image PV. Also, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume adjustment by operating the volume operation means 39 may be configured in the same manner as the specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) described above.

(Pattern 3) The sub-control means detects that the error flag is turned OFF at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event (here, the door is closed) that is the object of the error notification by the lamp. is used as a trigger, the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) instead of the storage area (hard Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume.

In addition, in the error notification by the lamp, the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed until a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is completed, and the error notification by the lamp is Can be displayed at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) (displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation, or displays it intentionally) You may make it become. Here, as a modification example when the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed, the configuration may be the same as the contents of the volume adjustment bar described in the specific error 1 (eg, movable body error). Also, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume adjustment by operating the volume operation means 39 may be configured in the same manner as the specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) described above. In these cases, the player may be allowed to adjust the amount of light. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern can be adjusted according to the game effect, it is desirable to configure so that the brightness of the light emission pattern cannot be adjusted according to the error. Further, it may be possible to disable the light amount adjustment by the player during the error notification.

Next, a case where specific error 3 (example: RAM clear notification) occurs will be described (explanation of the same parts as in the case of specific errors 1 and 2 described above will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly explained. ). Further, the present embodiment may be applied to either one or both of the notification when the RAM is cleared after performing the setting change process and the notification when the RAM is cleared without performing the setting change process. good.

The sub-control means performs the initial setting process described above when the game machine is powered on. If the power is turned on with RAM clearing, then the RAM clearing is notified by using the sound, lamp, and display means of the gaming machine. At the same time, the initializing operation of the movable body is executed. At this time, the effect control means executes the same processing as the specific error 1 described above, with ON of the error flag (RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger. Also, the error flag (a RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) is turned OFF as a trigger to execute the same processing as the specific error 1 described above.

(Pattern 1) During the RAM clearing notification, the configuration may be such that the volume can be adjusted by the switch on the back side, and the volume can not be adjusted by operating the operating means on the front side. The content of the volume control bar may be the same as that of the specific error 1 described above.

(Pattern 2) During the RAM clear notification, the volume can be adjusted by the volume control knob 140, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume control means 39 at least until the initialization of the movable body is completed. good too. Also, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be configured so as not to be displayed at least until the initialization of the movable body is completed, and then to be displayed. The content related to non-display and the content related to displayability may be the same as the specific error 1 described above.

(Pattern 3) The configuration may be such that the volume can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume operation means 39 during the RAM clear notification. Also, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be configured to be displayable. The displayable content may be the same content as the specific error 1 described above.

In these cases, the player may be allowed to adjust the amount of light even during the RAM clear notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern can be adjusted according to the game effect, it is desirable that the brightness of the light emission pattern cannot be adjusted according to the RAM clear notification. In addition, it is also possible to make it impossible for the player to adjust the amount of light during the RAM clear notification.

Next, a second embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, unlike the embodiments described so far, based on predetermined information indicating that an error has occurred, the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) is changed to the storage area (hard Vol) that stores the total volume. The value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is stored in a storage area for storing the total volume (total volume storage area) instead of being stored in the total volume storage area. In this embodiment, for example, when a specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) occurs, the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) even during the error is stored in the storage area for storing the total volume (total volume). volume storage area), the value stored in the storage area (software Vol) is changed, for example, when the volume operation means 39 is operated by the player. As a result, since the predetermined value in the storage area (total volume storage area) is changed, the configuration is such that the player can freely change the output volume of the sound related to the error using the volume control means 39 . Therefore, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the volume control by the volume control means 39 is disabled during an error. With such a configuration, even if the volume operation means 39 is operated by the player, the value of the storage area (software Vol) is not changed, resulting in a storage area (total volume). Since the value of the storage area) is also not changed, the output sound volume of the error-related sound cannot be changed by the sound volume operation means 39 .

Also, even if the player operates the volume control means 39 during error notification, the actual output volume cannot be adjusted/changed, but the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed. can be In this case, a signal for updating the display contents of the volume adjustment notification image PV is transmitted from the sub-control means to the display means in response to the operation of the volume operation means 39 . As a result, although the actual output volume cannot be adjusted/changed, it is possible to update the display content of the volume adjustment notification image PV. Further, it may be configured such that the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed during the error notification.

Further, in this embodiment, the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume even during an error. is operated, the position of the volume control knob 140 and the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) differ from each other. Vol). As a result, the new predetermined value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). Audio output volume can be adjusted/changed. Further, it may be configured so that the output volume of the error-related sound cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume control knob 140 is operated while the error is being reported.

Also, it may be possible to allow the player to adjust the amount of light even during the error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern can be adjusted according to the game effect, it is desirable to configure so that the brightness of the light emission pattern cannot be adjusted according to the error. Further, it may be possible to disable the light amount adjustment by the player during the error notification.

Next, a case where a specific error 2 (eg, door open error) occurs will be described (a description of the same parts as in the above-described specific error 1 will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described). When a door open error occurs, the game machine's sounds, lamps, and display means are used to notify the user of the error state. The notification ends at a predetermined timing, the error notification by the display means ends at the timing of the event that is the target of the error (here, the door is closed), and the error notification by the lamp is the event that is the target of the error (here, the door is closed). is configured to end at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the end of .

(Pattern 1) The effect control means is configured to disable the volume adjustment by the volume operation means 39 with the turning on of an error flag indicating that an error has occurred as a trigger. Further, the sound volume can be adjusted by the sound volume operation means 39 with the presence or absence of error sound output as a trigger at a predetermined timing when the error notification by sound ends.

In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV on the display means is hidden until a predetermined timing when the error notification by sound is terminated, and can be displayed at a predetermined timing when the error notification by sound is terminated (when the player performs an adjustment operation). may be displayed or intentionally displayed). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the content of adjustment of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. It is desirable that the content of adjustment be configured so as not to be reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, it may be configured so that the output volume of the error-related sound cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume control knob 140 is operated while the error is being reported. Also, it may be possible to allow the player to adjust the amount of light even during the error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern can be adjusted according to the game effect, it is desirable to configure so that the brightness of the light emission pattern cannot be adjusted according to the error. Further, it may be possible to disable the light amount adjustment by the player during the error notification.

(Pattern 2) The effect control means is configured to disable the volume adjustment by the operation means on the front side, triggered by the turning ON of an error flag indicating that an error has occurred.

Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed), the volume can be adjusted by the volume operation means 39 using the detection of the event subject to the error (here, the door closed) as a trigger. configured to be

In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means is hidden until a predetermined timing when the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) ends, and the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is not displayed. It may be possible to display at a predetermined timing (display when the player performs an adjustment operation, or display it intentionally). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the content of adjustment of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. It is desirable that the content of adjustment be configured so as not to be reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, it may be configured so that the output volume of the error-related sound cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume control knob 140 is operated while the error is being reported. Also, it may be possible to allow the player to adjust the amount of light even during the error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern can be adjusted according to the game effect, it is desirable to configure so that the brightness of the light emission pattern cannot be adjusted according to the error. Further, it may be possible to disable the light amount adjustment by the player during the error notification.

(Pattern 3) The effect control means is that the error flag is turned OFF at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event (here, the door is closed) that is the target of the error in the error notification by the lamp. is used as a trigger to disable volume adjustment by the volume control means. Furthermore, the error notification by the lamp is triggered by the turning off of the error flag at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed). 39 is configured to enable volume adjustment.

In addition, in the error notification by the lamp, the volume adjustment notification image PV on the display means is not displayed until a predetermined timing (after 30 seconds) after the event subject to the error (door closing in this case) is completed, and the error notification by the lamp is performed. The error notification can be displayed at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event that is the target of the error (here, the door is closed) (displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation or intentionally display). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the content of adjustment of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. It is desirable that the content of adjustment be configured so as not to be reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, it may be configured so that the output volume of the error-related sound cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume control knob 140 is operated while the error is being reported. Also, it may be possible to allow the player to adjust the amount of light even during the error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern can be adjusted according to the game effect, it is desirable to configure so that the brightness of the light emission pattern cannot be adjusted according to the error. Further, it may be possible to disable the light amount adjustment by the player during the error notification.

Next, a case where specific error 3 (example: RAM clear notification) occurs will be described (explanation of the same parts as in the case of specific errors 1 and 2 described above will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly explained. ). Further, the present embodiment may be applied to either one or both of the notification when the RAM is cleared after performing the setting change process and the notification when the RAM is cleared without performing the setting change process. good.

The sub-control means performs the initial setting process described above when the game machine is powered on. If the power is turned on with RAM clearing, then the RAM clearing is notified by using the sound, lamp, and display means of the gaming machine. At the same time, the initializing operation of the movable body is executed.

(Pattern 1) The effect control means is configured to disable the volume adjustment by the volume operation means 39 with the ON of the error flag (the RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger.

Further, the sound volume can be adjusted by the sound volume operation means 39 by turning OFF an error flag (a RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger. In addition, during the RAM clearing notification, the volume adjustment notification image PV on the display means is hidden, and can be displayed at the timing when the RAM clearing notification is completed (displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation or intentionally display). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the content of adjustment of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. It is desirable that the content of adjustment be configured so as not to be reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, it may be configured so that the output volume of the error-related sound cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated during the RAM clear notification. Further, it may be possible to allow the player to adjust the amount of light even during the RAM clear notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern can be adjusted according to the game effect, it is desirable to configure so that the brightness of the light emission pattern cannot be adjusted according to the error. Further, it may be possible to disable the light amount adjustment by the player during the error notification.

(Pattern 2) The configuration may be the same as that of pattern 1 described above, but the volume adjustment notification image PV may be configured differently. For example, at the timing when the initialization operation of the movable body is completed while the RAM is cleared, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means can be displayed from non-display (displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation or intentionally display).

(Pattern 3) The configuration may be the same as that of pattern 1 described above, but the volume adjustment notification image PV may be configured differently. For example, at the timing when the RAM clear notification is started, the volume adjustment notification image PV on the display means can be displayed from non-display (displayed or intentionally displayed when there is an adjustment operation by the player). You may do so.

Next, a third embodiment will be described. During error notification, set the maximum volume value for error output in the storage area (total volume storage area) that stores the total volume used to determine the final output sound, and determine the primary volume value described above. A volume value corresponding to the position of the volume control knob 140 may be set for the primary volume or the secondary volume that determines the secondary volume value. With such a configuration, the output volume of the error sound can be adjusted according to the position of the volume control knob 140 . Further, as described above, when the volume is adjusted by operating the volume operating means 39, the value in the storage area (soft Vol) is updated, and the updated value is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). It will be remembered. This allows the player to adjust the volume by operating the volume control means 34, but in the case of this embodiment, the total volume used to determine the final output sound is used during the error notification. Since the maximum volume value for error output is set in the storage area for storing the volume (total volume storage area), even if the volume is adjusted by operating the volume operating means 34 during the error notification, Also, the value in the storage area (total volume storage area) is not updated, and it is possible to prevent the player from lowering the output sound volume during the error notification. Further, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated, the volume value corresponding to the position is set as the secondary volume value in the secondary volume, so that the hall side can adjust the output volume during the error notification. ing. In addition, a game-related sound is emitted at an output volume calculated from the primary volume value for game, the secondary volume value for game, and the total volume value, and the sound related to an error is generated from the primary volume value for error and the secondary volume value for error. It is assumed that the output sound volume is calculated based on the volume value and the total volume value. It is desirable to set a low sound value (10) and set volume values corresponding to the volume control knob 140 as the primary volume value for error and the secondary volume value for error. As a result, the error sound is not obstructed by the game sound, so the error sound can be made more conspicuous.

In the above-described embodiment, the volume of the error notification sound cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control means 34 while the error notification is in progress. It may be configured to be adjustable. In this case, the sound volume can be adjusted in a plurality of steps, but the sound related to the error sound may not be muted.

Further, regarding the sound during error notification, the range in which the volume can be adjusted by the volume control knob 140 and the range in which the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume control means 39 may be made different. In that case, the range in which the volume can be adjusted by the volume control knob 140 may be made larger than the range in which the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume control means 39, or vice versa. Further, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 may be configured so that the sound during the error notification can be muted. In that case, it may be configured such that the sound during the error notification cannot be silenced by operating the volume control means 39 .

Depending on the type of error, the volume can be adjusted by the volume control knob 140, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume control means 39. Depending on the type of error, the volume control knob 140 and the volume control means 39 It may be configured so that the volume can be adjusted separately. For example, a launch position notification that notifies the launch position of the game ball, a launch position warning alert that warns the correct launch position when the game ball is launched in a direction that is not the proper launch position, and a game ball In the case of an error notification in which the player participates in the occurrence/cancellation of the error, such as the plate full tank notification that the game ball payout operation cannot be executed because the ball storage tray is full. may be configured so that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume operating means 39 . Further, the volume may be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume operation means 39 depending on the type of error.

In addition, in the case of an error notification in which the player is not involved in the occurrence/release of the error, such as when the payout operation cannot be performed normally or when the movable body cannot be operated normally, the volume adjustment knob 140 The volume may be adjusted by Also, the volume may be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume operation means 39 .

In addition, in the case of an error such as door opening, magnetic sensor error, vibration sensor error, radio wave sensor error, etc., the volume may be adjusted by the volume control knob 140 . Also, it may be configured such that the volume adjustment is disabled.

Further, the volume of predetermined notifications such as RAM clear notification, setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, backup recovery notification, etc. that are performed when the power is turned on may be adjusted by the volume control knob 140 . Further, the volume may be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume operation means 39, or the volume may be disabled.

In the case of a game machine that displays a demo screen when the non-game state continues for a predetermined time, if the volume is adjusted by operating the volume control means 39 in the non-game state, the demo screen display is started. It may be configured to clear the count for a predetermined time. Further, in this case, when the volume is adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 99, the count of the predetermined time until the demonstration screen is displayed may not be cleared.

Although each of the above-described embodiments has been described as separate embodiments in order to clarify the content, the respective embodiments may be combined. Also, all contents of different embodiments may be combined, or one part of each embodiment may be extracted and combined into another embodiment.

In the embodiment, regarding the lower limit information and the upper limit information that define the range of the jackpot determination random number, the upper limit information is different for each set value, and the lower limit information is common. The value information may be made different and the upper limit information may be shared, or both the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information may be made different for each set value.

Also, the present invention can be similarly implemented in various pinball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a mammoth game machine, as well as game machines other than pinball game machines such as slot machines.

18 lower speaker 25 upper speaker 39 volume control means (first control means)
41 production button (predetermined part)
72 vibration device (driving means)
140 volume adjustment knob (second operation means)

Claims (1)

a pattern display means capable of variably displaying patterns;
an image display means capable of displaying an image;
audio output means capable of outputting audio;
Vibration sound generating means capable of generating vibration sound by vibrating a predetermined part,
A special game advantageous to the player can be executed when the stopped symbols after variation by the symbol display means are in a specific mode.
In gaming machines,
The image display means is capable of executing an image effect using a plurality of types of character images including a first character image and a second character image,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that performs a suggestive effect that suggests the possibility of becoming the specific mode,
The specific effect has a first half section in which the suggestive effect is not executed and a second half section in which the suggestive effect is executed,
The audio output means is
When executing the first half section, outputting a sound related to the specific effect at a first volume,
When executing the second half section, outputting the sound related to the specific effect at a second volume that is higher than the first volume,
outputting a sound related to the specific effect at a third volume smaller than the first volume after execution of the first half section and before execution of the second half section;
The vibrating sound generating means can generate the vibrating sound in parallel with the sound when outputting the sound related to the specific effect at the second volume,
when outputting a first sound corresponding to the first character image, outputting the first sound while the first character image is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when outputting a second sound corresponding to the second character image, the second sound can be output in a state in which the second character image is not displayed.

Images